Manual F57

Contents
A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI CONVERTIBLE.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 915 102 - X/16

MINI Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with
your MINI.

© 2016 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID4 X/16, 11 16 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ MOBILITY
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 188 Refueling
page 254. 190 Fuel
192 Wheels and tires
210 Engine compartment
6 Information
212 Engine oil
AT A GLANCE 216 Coolant
14 Cockpit 218 Maintenance
18 Onboard monitor 220 Replacing components
26 Voice activation system 231 Breakdown assistance
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 237 Care
CONTROLS REFERENCE
34 Opening and closing 244 Technical data
55 Settings 247 Appendix
64 Transporting children safely 254 Everything from A to Z
68 Driving
83 Displays
103 Lights
109 Safety
127 Driving stability control systems
131 Driving comfort
149 Climate control
157 Interior equipment
164 Storage compartments
167 Cargo area
DRIVING TIPS
174 Things to remember when driving
178 Saving fuel

Information
Information
Using this Owner's Man‐ Additional sources of in‐
ual formation
Orientation Dealer’s service center
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
ular topic is by using the index. questions at any time.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter. Internet
The Owner's Manual and general Information
Updates made after the editorial about MINI, for example on technology, are
deadline available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐ MINI Motorer’s Guide app
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐ The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
uals: tries as an app for iOS or Android in the respec‐
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. tive Store.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Symbols and displays
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
Entertainment, Communication
personal injury and serious damage to the
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, vehicle.
and Communication can be obtained as printed
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
book from the service center.
information.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
Communication can also be called up via the
select individual functions.
following Owner's Manuals:
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
activation system..
Display in the vehicle.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
6
Information
Action steps Status of the Owner's

Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
Manual
the defined order.
Basic information
1. First action step. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
2. Second action step. policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
Enumerations embody the highest quality and safety stand‐
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐ ards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
bullet points. those in your vehicle.
▷ First possibility.
Updates made after the editorial
▷ Second possibility. deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
Symbols on vehicle components ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
Indicates that you should consult the er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for uals:
information on a particular part or assembly.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Vehicle features and op‐ ▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
tions
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series. For Your Own Safety
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are Manufacturer
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische
cause of the selected optional features or the
Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.
country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and Intended use
systems.
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
When using these functions and systems, the
▷ Owner's Manual.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐ ▷ Technical vehicle data.
mentary Owner's Manuals. ▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to the vehicle is driven.
answer any questions that you may have about ▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
the features and options applicable to your ve‐ ments.
hicle.
7
Information
Warranty The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐

Your vehicle is technically configured for the uine MINI parts and accessories.
operating conditions and registration require‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
ments applying in the country of first delivery evaluate whether each individual product from
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is another manufacturer can be used with MINI
to be operated in a different country it might vehicles without presenting a safety hazard,
be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten‐ even if a country-specific official approval was
tially differing operating conditions and permit issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply not evaluate whether these products are suita‐
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐ ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐ California Proposition 65 Warning
formation on warranty is available from a California laws require us to state the following
dealer’s service center. warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
Maintenance and repairs
bile components and parts, including compo‐
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
materials and high-performance electronics, cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
requires suitable maintenance and repair work. State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
MINI dealer’s service center. If you choose to products of component wear contain or emit
use another service facility, the manufacturer of chemicals known to the State of California to
your vehicle recommends use of a facility that cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
performs work, for instance maintenance and ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
repair, according to MINI specifications with lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
properly trained personnel, referred to in this pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
Owner's Manual as "another qualified service engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
center or repair shop". cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
If work is performed improperly, for instance your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐ water.
sequent damage and related safety risks.
Service and warranty
Parts and accessories We recommend that you read this publication
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
the use of parts and accessory products ap‐ lowing warranties:
proved by the manufacturer of the MINI. ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
their use and installation are available from a ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
MINI dealer's service center.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by the
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and
Warranty.
suitability in MINI vehicles.
8
Information
Detailed information about these warranties is records the state of a component, a module, a
listed in the Service and Warranty Information system or the environment:
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and ▷ Operating mode of system components,
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. e.g., fill levels.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its
designed to meet the particular operating con‐ individual components, for example wheel
ditions and homologation requirements in your rotational speed, wheel speed, decelera‐
country and continental region in order to de‐ tion, transverse acceleration.
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
operated under those conditions. If you wish to
components, e.g., lights and brakes.
operate your vehicle in another country or re‐
gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐ ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ditions and homologation requirements. You ing the stability control system.
should also be aware of any applicable war‐ ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country This data is purely technical in nature and is
or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐ used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
tomer Relations for further information. mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
Maintenance data. When service offerings are used, for ex‐
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the ample repair services, service processes, war‐
road safety, operational reliability and the New ranty claims, quality assurance, this technical
Vehicle Limited Warranty. information can be read out from the event
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ and fault memories by employees of a dealer’s
ures: service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
▷ MINI Maintenance system
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet further information there if you need it. After
for US models an error is corrected, the information in the
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a
Canadian models continuous basis.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to With the vehicle in use there are situations
these specifications, this could result in serious where you can associate this technical data
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not with individuals if combined with other infor‐
covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐ mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
ranty. vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
Data memory agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - allow certain vehicle data
Many electronic components on your vehicle
to be transmitted from the vehicle.
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
9
Information
Event Data Recorder EDR Vehicle identification

This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ number
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
The vehicle identification number can be found
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were in the engine compartment.
operating.
The vehicle identification number can also be
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
found behind the windshield.
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
Reporting safety defects
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐ For US customers
standing of the circumstances in which crashes The following only applies to vehicles owned
and injuries occur. and operated in the US.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐ which could cause a crash or could cause injury
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐ or death, you should immediately inform the
tions and no personal data, e. g., name, gen‐ National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
der, age, and crash location, are recorded. NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
ment, could combine the EDR data with the Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ 1-800-831-1117.
quired during a crash investigation. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
To read data recorded by an EDR, special open an investigation, and if it finds that a
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ may order a recall and remedy campaign.
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
enforcement, that have the special equipment, individual problems between you, your dealer,
can read the information if they have access to or MINI of North America, LLC.
the vehicle or the EDR.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
10
Information
You can also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor ve‐
hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐
ety.
11
WATCH ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and op‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
tions also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
This chapter describes all standard, country- tems. When using these functions and systems,
specific and optional features offered with the the applicable laws and regulations must be
series. It also describes features that are not observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows, all 46 Light switch 103

2 Power windows, individual 46
3 Exterior mirror operation 61 Lights off
4 Buttons of the central locking system 39 Daytime running lights 105
5 Lights Parking lights 103
Front fog lights 106
Low beams 103

Rear fog lights 106
14
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Automatic headlight control 104 Roadside parking lights 104

Cornering light 105
High-beam Assistant 105 Onboard computer 92
Instrument lighting 107
8 Instrument cluster 83
6 Steering wheel buttons, left 9 Steering column stalk, right
Camera-based cruise control on/ Windshield wipers 74
off 131
Cruise control on/off 136 Rain sensor 75
Cruise control: store speed Cleaning windows 75
Pausing, continuing cruise control

10 Steering wheel buttons, right
Voice activation 26
Cruise control: increase speed
Telephone
Cruise control: reduce speed
Confirm the selection 92

Camera-based cruise control: re‐
duce distance
Move selection up 92
Camera-based cruise control: in‐
crease distance
Move selection down 92
7 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 73 Increase volume
High beams, head‐ Reduce volume

light flasher 73
High-beam Assistant 105

11 Horn, entire surface
12 Adjust the steering wheel 63

13 Unlock hood 210
15
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Functions and controls in the center console
1 Hazard warning system 231 Start/stop the engine and switch

the ignition on/off 68
Intelligent Safety 119 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 127
2 Control Display 18 Head-up Display 98

3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 164 7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 78
5 Climate control 149 Manual transmission selector lever 77
6 PDC Park Distance Control 138 8 Controller with buttons 19
Rearview camera 141 9 Parking brake 72
Parking assistant 144 10 MINI Driving Modes switch 129
Auto Start/Stop function 70
16
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
All around the interior mirror
1 Emergency Request 4 Ambient light 107
2 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐ 5 Convertible top 48

ger airbag 111
3 Reading lights 107 6 Interior lights 107
17
AT A GLANCE Onboard monitor
Onboard monitor
Vehicle features and op‐ Overview of control ele‐
tions ments
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Operation
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept 1 Control Display
The onboard monitor combines the functions 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
of a multitude of switches. Thus, these func‐ the equipment version, with touchpad
tions can be operated from a central location.
Control Display
Safety information General information

To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
WARNING
structions.
Operating the integrated information sys‐
Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐
tems and communication devices while driving
play; otherwise, the Control Display can be
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose
damaged.
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only use the systems or devices when the In the case of very high temperatures on the
traffic situation allows. If necessary, stop and Control Display, e.g., due to intense solar radia‐
use the systems and devices while the vehicle is tion, the brightness may be reduced down to
stationary.◀ complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, e.g., through shadow or climate
control system, the normal functions are re‐
stored.
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
18
Onboard monitor AT A GLANCE
Switching off
1. Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Buttons on the controller
Button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
Controller with navigation system RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
rectly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings. NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
Some functions of the onboard monitor can be TEL Opens the Phone menu.
operated using the touchpad on the controller:
BACK Displays the previous panel.
▷ Turn.
OPTION Open the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
19
▷ Move in two directions. The main menu is displayed.

All onboard monitor functions can be called up
via the main menu.
Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.
Buttons on the controller
Button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
AUDIO Open audio menu last listened to,

switch between audio menus.
TEL Opens the Phone menu. 2. Press the controller.
BACK Open the previous display. Menu items in the Owner's Manual
OPTION Open the Options menu. In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Operating concept Changing between panels

After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
Opening the main menu
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Press button. ▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing BACK
button. In this case, the current panel is not
closed.
20
▷ Move the controller to the right. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Opens new display on top of previous is displayed.
screen.

Arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that
additional panels can be opened. Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
Opening the Options menu box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
Press button.
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some functions of the onboard monitor can be
operated using the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
1. "Settings"
Additional options: move the controller to the
2. "Touchpad"
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed. 3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
Options menu ▷ "Interactive map": use the interactive
The "Options" menu consists of various areas: map.
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
▷ Control options for the selected main letters and numbers.
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
Entering letters and numbers
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
Changing settings following:
1. Select a field.
21
▷ The system distinguishes between upper Example: setting the

and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to clock
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to Setting the clock
page 25.
1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
played.
the Control Display.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
highlighted, and then press the controller.
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
upper area of the touchpad.
to display "Time/Date".
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
in the lower area of the touchpad.
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Operating the interactive map 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
The interactive map in the navigation system
can be moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Interactive map. Swipe into respective di‐

rection.
Enlarge/shrink in‐ Drag in or out on the

teractive map. touchpad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours, and
Changing settings then press the controller.
You can use the touchpad to change Control 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes, and
Display settings, for instance volume. Swipe left then press the controller.
or right accordingly.
22
Status information Symbol Meaning
SIM card is missing.

Status field
Enter PIN.
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
Entertainment symbols
▷ Current entertainment source. Symbol Meaning
▷ Sound output, on/off. Music collection.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
Gracenote® database.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception. AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.

Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows:
Additional symbols
Radio symbols Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning Spoken instructions are turned off.
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.

Split screen
Telephone symbols General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
Symbol Meaning
right side of the split screen, for example, infor‐
Incoming or outgoing call. mation from the onboard computer.
Missed call. In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
Wireless network reception strength. when you change to another menu.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Switching the split screen on/off
Wireless network is not available.
On the Control Display:
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active. 1. Press button.

2. "Split screen"
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card. Selecting the display

On the Control Display:
SIM card is blocked.
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
23
3. Move the Controller until the split screen is Displaying the button assignment
selected. Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
4. Press the Controller or select "Split screen gloves or use objects.
content". The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
5. Select the desired menu item. screen.
Deleting the button assignments

Programmable memory 1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
buttons
2. "OK"
General information
The onboard monitor functions can be stored
on the programmable memory buttons and Deleting personal in the
called up directly, e.g., radio stations, naviga‐ vehicle
tion destinations, phone numbers and menu
entries. The concept
Settings are stored for the profile currently Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves per‐
used. sonal data, such as stored radio stations. These
personal data can be permanently deleted via
Saving a function the onboard monitor.
1. Highlight function via the onboard monitor.
General information
2. Press and hold the desired button, Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
until a signal sounds. lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Personal Profile settings.
Running a function
▷ Stored radio stations.
Press button.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
The function will work immediately.
▷ Travel and on-board computer information.
This means, e.g., that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected. ▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Voice notes
24
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up Symbol Function

to 30 minutes.
Enter the letters.
Functional requirement Enter the numbers.
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
or Tip the controller up.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Without navigation system
Display. Select the symbol.
1. Switch on the ignition. Entry comparison

2. "Settings" When entering names and addresses, the
3. Open "Options". choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
4. "Delete all personal data" tered and letters may be added automatically.
5. "Continue" Entries are continuously compared with data

stored in the vehicle.
6. "OK"
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
Entering letters and ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available on
numbers the Control Display.
General information
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers, if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete letters or

number.
Press the controller for an extended

period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,

numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters
and numbers:
25
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and op‐ Using voice activation
tions
Activating the voice activation system
specific and optional features offered with the 1. Press button on the steering wheel.
series. It also describes features that are not 2. Wait for the signal.
to the selected options or country versions. This 3. Say the command.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ A command that is recognized by the voice
tems. When using these functions and systems, activation system is announced and dis‐
the applicable laws and regulations must be played in the instrument cluster.
observed. This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
The concept the function via the onboard monitor.
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐ Terminating the voice activation
mands via the voice activation system. The system
system supports you with announcements Briefly press the button on the steering
during input. wheel or ›Cancel‹.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
Possible commands
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side. Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Man‐
ual to use with the voice activation system. The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Requirements There are short commands for many functions.
You may select lists such as phone lists via
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
also supported by the voice activation system
actly as they show in the respective list.
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Having possible commands read aloud
Set the language, refer to page 96.
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
E.g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
26
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Executing functions using short

commands 2. Press button on the steering wheel.
Execute functions on the main menu via short 3. ›Tone‹
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, for example, ›Vehicle
status‹. Setting the voice dialog
The list for short commands of the voice activa‐ You can set the system to use standard dialog
tion system can be called up via the Integrated or a short version.
Owner's Manual on the Control Display.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system 1. "Settings"
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ 2. "Language/Units"
Additional commands for the help dialog: 3. "Speech type:"
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ 4. Select setting.
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
Adjusting the volume
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
voice activation system is announced. structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
One example: opening the ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
tone settings rently used.
Via the main menu

The commands of the menu items are spoken
Information on Emer‐
just as they are selected via the controller. gency Requests
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
needed. tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
2. Press button on the steering wheel. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
3. ›Radio‹ of a phone connection.
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command Environmental condi‐

The desired tone settings can also be started tions
via a short command.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
needed. sis, and speed.
27
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
▷ Always say commands in the language of

the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and convertible
top closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
28
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle AT A GLANCE
Integrated Owner's Manual in the

vehicle
Vehicle features and op‐ Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
tions scriptions. This is helpful when the terminology
This chapter describes all standard, country- for a feature is not at hand.
series. It also describes features that are not Owner's Manual
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Search for information and descriptions by en‐
to the selected options or country versions. This tering terms selected from the index.
tems. When using these functions and systems, Select components
observed. 1. Press button.
2. Turn the Controller: open "Vehicle
info".
Integrated Owner's Man‐ 3. Press the Controller.
ual in the vehicle 4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
Concept
▷ "Search by pictures"
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐ ▷ "Owner's Manual"
hicle. It can be displayed on the Control Display.
Components of the Integrated Owner's

Manual
General information
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide Leafing through the Owner's Manual

The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic Page by page with link access
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a Turn the controller until the next or previous
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ page is displayed.
played while driving.
Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
29
AT A GLANCE Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press

the Controller to browse from page to page. 4. Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
Scroll back.
5. Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
Scroll forward.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
Context help - operating instructions time.
for the currently selected function
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The relevant information can be displayed di‐ General information
rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the Pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Opening via onboard monitor rectly.
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display: Storing
1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the onboard
1. Press button or move the controller to monitor.
the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed. 2. Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Executing
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed Press button.
Directly from the Check Control message on the The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
Control Display: mediately.
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the Controller to

the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
30
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle AT A GLANCE
31
HANDLE ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and op‐ WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
tions with special knowledge.
This chapter describes all standard, country- Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
specific and optional features offered with the cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
series. It also describes features that are not tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due the vehicle from the outside when there are
to the selected options or country versions. This people in it.◀
tems. When using these functions and systems, WARNING
the applicable laws and regulations must be Unattended children or animals can
observed. cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
Remote control ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
General information
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
Each remote control contains a replaceable ▷ Using vehicle equipment.

battery. Replace the battery, refer to page 36. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
You may set the key functions depending on leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
the optional features and country-specific ver‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when
sion. Settings, refer to page 44. exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
The vehicle stores personal settings for every

remote control. Personal Profile, refer to Overview
page 42.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
control, refer to page 218.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
1 Unlocking
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take 2 Locking
the remote control with you so that the vehicle 3 Unlocking the tailgate
can be opened from the outside.◀ 4 Panic mode
34
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Unlocking long as the button on the remote control is

pressed.
Press button on the remote control.
With Comfort Access:
Depending on the settings, refer to page 44, If close to the vehicle, the convertible top can
the following access points are unlocked. also be opened.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap. Press the remote control button again
Press the button of the remote control after the sliding sun roof integrated
again to unlock the other vehicle access into the convertible top is fully opened. Press
points. and hold the button until the convertible top is
fully opened and locked.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐ Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the mo‐
cuted: tion.
▷ The settings saved in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 42, are applied. Locking
▷ The interior lights, courtesy lights and the 1. Close the driver's door.
MINI logo projection are activated.
2. Press button on the remote con‐
These functions are not available if the inte‐
trol.
rior lights were switched off manually.
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
▷ The welcome lights are switched on, if this
locked.
function was activated.
The alarm system, refer to page 45, is
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 45, is
switched on.
switched off.
If the engine or ignition is still switched on
The light functions may depend on the ambient
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
brightness.
honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition
must be switched off by means of the Start/
Convenient opening
Stop button.
Safety information
With Comfort Access: convenient
WARNING closing
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hardtop. There is a risk of in‐ Safety information
jury. When opening and closing the convertible WARNING
top, observe the movement and keep the area
With convenient closing, body parts can
of movement clear.◀
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
Opening during convenient closing.◀
Press and hold this button on the re‐
WARNING
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the sliding sun roof inte‐ and closing the hardtop. There is a risk of in‐
grated into the convertible top are opened, as jury. When opening and closing the convertible
35
top, observe the movement and keep the area Safety information
of movement clear.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
Closing ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
Press and hold the button on the re‐ sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
mote control in the area close to the is clear during opening and closing.◀
vehicle, until the closing operation is com‐
pleted. Opening
The windows and convertible top close.
Press button on the remote control for
Releasing the button stops the closing proce‐ approx. 1 second.
dure. Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops
the motion of the convertible top. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
Press button in the vicinity of the vehicle again downward.
until the convertible top operation is com‐
pleted. Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Switch on interior lights and courtesy
light Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Press button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked. To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The MINI logo projection is also switched on.
Replacing the battery
These functions are not available if the interior
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐
lights were switched off manually.
mote control, refer to page 38.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
2. Slide the integrated key into the opening
brightness.
and raise the cover.
If the button is pressed within 10 seconds of
The battery compartment is accessible.
when the vehicle was locked Interior motion
sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft
warning system, refer to page 46, are turned
off. After locking, wait 10 seconds before press‐
ing the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 44.
36
3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the Malfunction

battery compartment and raise the cover.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 36.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
4. Push battery in the direction of the arrow with high transmitting power.
using a pointed object and lift it out.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
gether with electronic devices.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐ ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
tive side facing up. charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
6. Insert lid and cover.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
7. Push the integrated key into the remote
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
control until it engages.
integrated key, refer to page 38.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐ Starting the engine via emergency
fied service center or repair shop or detection of the remote control
take them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls

Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls

A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another 1. Hold the remote control as shown against
qualified service center or repair shop. the marked area on the steering column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
37
If the remote control is not detected, slightly Removing

change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the inte‐
The integrated key can also be used for the grated key, arrow 2.
glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
Safety information Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key. The other doors
WARNING must be unlocked or locked from the inside.
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
1. Remove lid on the door lock.
with special knowledge.
To do this, slide the integrated key into the
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
opening from below and remove the lid.
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the inte‐
grated key inserted, paint or key can be dam‐
aged. There is a risk of property damage. Re‐ 2. Unlock or lock door lock.
move the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀ Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock. In order to stop this alarm, un‐
lock vehicle with the remote control or switch
on the ignition, if needed, through emergency
detection of the remote control, refer to
page 37.
38
Buttons for the central Comfort Access

locking system
Concept
General information The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning All you need to do is to have the remote control
system and interior lights come on. with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
Overview control when it is in close proximity or in the
vehicle's interior.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
Buttons for the central locking system.
▷ Opening tailgate.
Locking Functional requirements

Press the button with the doors closed. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. the doors.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
when locking. possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking Unlocking
Press button.
Opening
▷ Press button to unlock the doors

together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ Pull the door opener on the door to be
opened. The other door remain locked. On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐
dle, press the button.
This corresponds to pressing the remote control

button:
39
Lock Closing
On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐ Press and hold down the handle of the driver or
dle, press the button. the front seat passenger.
This corresponds to pressing the remote control This corresponds to pressing and holding the
button: remote control button:
To save battery power, ensure that all power In addition to locking, the convertible top and
consumers are turned off before locking the ve‐ the windows are closed.
hicle. Press and hold the button, until the convertible
top is fully closed.
Convenient closing
Opening the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING General information
With convenient closing, body parts can If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure locked doors are not unlocked.
that the area of movement of the doors is clear To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place
during convenient closing.◀ the remote control in the cargo area.
WARNING
Safety information
WARNING
and closing the hardtop. There is a risk of in‐
jury. When opening and closing the convertible Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
top, observe the movement and keep the area ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
of movement clear.◀ sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
40
Opening Depending on your vehicle's equipment and

the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 44.
Safety information
WARNING
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
Press button on the exterior of the tailgate. sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Malfunction
Opening from the outside
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 36.
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
gether with metal objects.
have the remote control with you.
Press button on the tailgate.
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control. ▷ Press button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
gether with electronic devices. Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
mote control, refer to page 36.
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
page 38. downward.
Opening from the inside

Tailgate With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place Closing
the remote control in the cargo area. To close the tailgate, swivel it upwards and
press it closed.
41
Trunk emergency unlocking There is an additional guest profile available

that is not assigned to any remote control: it
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allocated
to the driver.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area. This is the case when:
The tailgate unlocks. ▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
Personal Profile driver's door.
Concept
Settings
Via Personal Profiles, individual settings for sev‐
The settings for the following systems and func‐
eral drivers can be stored and called up again
tions are saved in the active profile. The scope
when required.
of storable settings depends on country and
equipment.
General information
▷ Unlocking and locking.
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐ ▷ Lights.
mote control has one of these driver profiles ▷ Radio.
assigned. ▷ Instrument cluster.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ ▷ Programmable memory buttons.
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
▷ Volumes, tone.
activated. All settings stored in the driver profile
are automatically applied. ▷ Control Display.
If several drivers use their own remote control, ▷ Climate control.
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐ ▷ Navigation.
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored,
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
if the vehicle has been used in the meantime
by a person with a different remote control. ▷ Rearview camera.
Changes to the settings are automatically saved ▷ Head-up Display.

in the driver profile currently activated. ▷ MINI Driving Modes.
If another driver profile is selected via the on‐ ▷ Intelligent Safety.
board monitor, the settings saved in it will be
applied automatically. The new driver profile is
assigned to the remote control currently used.
42
Profile management The active profile is selected.

3. Open "Options".
Opening profiles
4. "Rename current profile"
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated. Reset profiles
Via the onboard monitor: The settings of the active profile are reset to
1. "Settings" their factory settings.
2. "Profiles" Via the onboard monitor:
3. Select a profile. 1. "Settings"
The following functions are executed: 2. "Profiles"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile The current profile is selected.
are automatically applied. 3. Open "Options".
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ 4. "Reset current profile"
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐ Exporting profiles
ent remote control, this profile will apply to Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
both remote controls. ported.
This can be helpful for saving and retrieving
Using a guest profile
personal settings, for instance before delivering
The guest profile is for individual settings that the vehicle to a workshop. Profiles can be taken
are stored in none of the three personal pro‐ to another vehicle equipped with the Personal
files. Profile function.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the Export is made via the USB port to a USB stor‐
vehicle temporarily and do not have their own age device.
profile.
Popular file systems for USB media are sup‐
Via the onboard monitor: ported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom‐
1. "Settings" mended formats for profile export. Other for‐
mats may not support the export.
2. "Profiles"
Via the onboard monitor:
3. "Guest"
4. Adjust the settings. 1. "Settings"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not 2. "Profiles"

assigned to the current remote control. 3. "Export profile"
4. "USB device"
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ Importing profiles
file to avoid confusion between the profiles. Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be
Via the onboard monitor: imported via the USB interface.
1. "Settings" Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐

ported profile.
2. "Profiles"
43
Via the onboard monitor: Unlock

1. "Settings"
Doors
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
1. "Settings"
4. "USB device"
2. "Doors/key"
Display profile list during start 3. Select the symbol.
The profile list can be displayed during each 4. Select the desired function.
start to select the desired profile. ▷ "Driver's door only"
Via the onboard monitor: Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
1. "Settings" flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
2. "Profiles"
▷ "All doors"
3. Open "Options".
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
4. "Display user list at startup"
Tailgate
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote control
and driver may not be possible in the following 1. "Settings"
cases, for example. 2. "Doors/key"
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his 3. Select the symbol.
or her own remote control, but another
4. Select the desired function.
person is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Automatic locking
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not 1. "Settings"
locked and unlocked. 2. "Doors/key"
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐ 3. Select the desired setting.
side of the vehicle. ▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
Settings opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
General information
The vehicle locks automatically after
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
you drive off.
the country version, various settings for open‐
ing and closing are possible.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
These settings are saved in the active driver
profile, refer to page 42.
1. "Settings"
44
2. "Doors/key" Overview
3. Select the desired setting.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Alarm system Switching on and off

When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
General information
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm the alarm system is switched on and off at the
system reacts to the following changes: same time.
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
or the tailgate. Opening the doors with the alarm
▷ Movements in the vehicle interior. system switched on
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ The alarm system is triggered when a door is
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing opened if the door was unlocked using the in‐
the vehicle. tegrated key in the door lock.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage. Switching off the alarm, refer to page 46.
▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Di‐
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
agnosis.
system switched on
The alarm system signals these changes visually
The tailgate can be opened even when the
and acoustically:
alarm system is switched on.
▷ By acoustic alarm.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system. monitored again provided the doors are
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
45
Signals of the indicator lightSignals of ▷ In automatic vehicle washes.

the indicator lights ▷ In duplex garages.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
2 seconds: at sea or on a trailer.
The alarm system is switched on. ▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐ For such situations, the tilt alarm sensor and in‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐ terior motion sensor can be switched off.
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate interior motion sensor
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
Press the remote control button again
access points are secured.
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi‐
When the still open access points are cle is locked.
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
sensor will be switched on.
onds and then continues to flash.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
The vehicle has not been tampered with. are turned off until the vehicle is locked again.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
Switching off the alarm
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
An alarm has been triggered. or switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
Tilt alarm sensor fer to page 37.
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. ▷ With Comfort Access: If you have the re‐
The alarm system responds in situations such as mote control with you, unlock the vehicle
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is using the button on the driver's side or pas‐
towed. senger side door.
Interior motion sensor

The interior is monitored to the height of the Power windows
seats. The alarm system is switched on together
with the interior motion sensor even when the General information
convertible top is open. Falling objects such as
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.
windows are automatically closed except a
gap.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
Safety information
General information
WARNING
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may trigger the alarm even though no one is When operating the windows, body parts
trying to gain unauthorized access. and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
Possible situations for an unintended alarm:
46
that the area of movement of the windows is All side windows open simultaneously while
clear during opening and closing.◀ the switch is being held.
WARNING ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐

Unattended children or animals can ance point.
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ All side windows automatically open simul‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ taneously. Pressing the switch again stops
tions: the motion.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
▷ Releasing the parking brake. fer to page 35.
Closing
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment. ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not The window closes while the switch is being
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ held.
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
Overview The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the
motion.
▷ Pull the switch.

All side windows close simultaneously while
the switch is being held.
Convenient closing via the remote control, refer
to page 35.
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
page 40.
Opening
▷ Press the button to the resistance Pinch protection system

point.
General information
The window opens while the switch is being
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a
held.
window closes, closing is interrupted.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ The window opens slightly.
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
▷ Press the button to the resistance

point.
47
Safety information Initializing the system

WARNING The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a During initialization, the affected window
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the closes without jam protection .
area of movement of the windows.◀ WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
Closing without the jam protection and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
system injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
In case of danger from the outside or if ice that the area of movement of the windows is
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐ clear during opening and closing.◀
lows:
1. Open the affected window completely.
1. Pull the switch past the resistance 2. Pull the switch to the resistance point
point and hold it there. and hold.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐ The window closes.
tion . If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted. 3. Continue holding the switch pulled to
the resistance point.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
Depending on the equipment, the window
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
opens and closes one or twice after approx.
hold it there.
15 seconds.
The window closes without jam protection .
4. Release switch.
Malfunction
General information Convertible top with in‐

In certain situations a window can only be op‐ tegrated sliding sun
erated to a limited extent. roof
▷ After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the a window can only be Overview
operated to a limited extent. The system
must be initialized in this case.
▷ The power window motors are equipped
with overheating protection. If a window is
opened and closed several times within a
short period of time, the overheating pro‐
tection switches the motor off temporarily.
Depending on the degree of overheating, it
may only be possible to close the window
or it may not be possible to operate it at all.
Convertible top, sliding sun roof switch
In this case: allow the power window motor
to cool down.
48
Sliding sun roof the ventilation so that no vacuum is pro‐

duced in the vehicle.
General information ▷ It is not possible to start the engine and op‐
Before closing the sliding sun roof, remove any erate the convertible top simultaneously.
foreign objects from the windshield frame; oth‐ When the engine is started using the Start/
erwise, closing may be prevented. Stop button or using the Auto Start/Stop
function, the convertible top movement is
Opening briefly interrupted.
Press the switch backward, until ▷ Opening a door interrupts closure of the
the desired position is reached convertible top.
or the sliding sun roof is fully ▷ When loading the cargo area, make sure
open. that the cargo does not push against the
cargo area partition, refer to page 51,
from below.
Closing ▷ In order to protect the battery, move the
Press the switch forward, until convertible top only when the engine is
the desired position is reached running if possible.
or the sliding sun roof is closed. ▷ Before closing the convertible top, remove
any foreign objects from the windshield
frame; otherwise, closing may be pre‐
vented.
Convertible top
Safety information
General information
NOTE
The convertible top can be opened or closed at
speeds up to approx. 18 mph/30 km/h. Incorrect operation can damage the con‐
vertible top and other parts of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is accelerated above a speed of
approx. 18 mph/30 km/h while the convertible There is a risk of property damage. During op‐
top is being moved, the convertible top move‐ eration, heed the following points:
ment stops. ▷ Keep the area of movement of the conver‐
Observe the following information: tible top clear because the convertible top
swivels out upward. Maximum area of
▷ While the convertible top is moving, it is not
movement: 78.8 inches/2 meters.
possible to open the tailgate.
▷ Fully close the tailgate.
▷ If possible, close the convertible top when
the vehicle is parked. A closed convertible ▷ Do not leave the convertible top open for
top protects it from weather-related dam‐ more than a day while it is wet.
age and to some extent from theft. ▷ Do not open the convertible top, if it is wet,
▷ Even when the convertible top is closed, covered in snow, iced up, or dirty.
only store valuables in the locked cargo ▷ Do not place objects on the convertible top.
area or in the locked glove compartment. ▷ The rollover protection system may not be
▷ At higher speeds, vacuum produced in the triggered.
vehicle interior causes the convertible top ▷ Do not operate convertible top on uneven
to begin to flutter. Increase the air flow via sections of road.
49
▷ Always open or close the convertible top ▷ The cargo area partition, refer to page 51,
completely. The convertible top is only is stored and latched in the bottom posi‐
locked in the final positions. tion.
▷ Make sure that no objects are on the cargo ▷ The tailgate is closed.
cover when opening the convertible top.◀ ▷ The external temperature is above
WARNING 14 ℉/-10 ℃.
Body parts can be jammed when opening ▷ The voltage of the vehicle electrical system
and closing the hardtop. There is a risk of in‐ is sufficient.
jury. When opening and closing the convertible ▷ The convertible top drive is not overheat‐
top, observe the movement and keep the area ing.
of movement clear.◀ ▷ Vehicle speed is below 18 mph/30 km/h.
WARNING ▷ The windows can be lowered.
When operating the convertible top while If this requirement is not met, a check control
driving, the view to the rear may be limited. At message is displayed.
speeds above 20 mph/30 km/h the convertible
top remains in its current position. There is a Operating from the inside
danger of accidents and property damage.
When operating the convertible top while driv‐ Opening
ing, observe traffic attentively and if necessary, Press the switch backward and
reduce speed. Do not operate while backing up hold until the sliding sunroof is
or with wind.◀ open.
WARNING Press the switch backward again
The convertible top is not suitable for the and hold. The windows roll down
mounting of roof carrier systems. The roof car‐ and the convertible top opens while the switch
rier could come loose. There is risk of an acci‐ is being pulled. After the convertible top is
dent. Do not attach any roof carrier systems to completely open, the switch can be held or
the convertible top.◀ pressed again briefly in order to raise the win‐
dows.
WARNING
A convertible top that is not completely Closing
open or closed is not locked and can open by
Push the switch forward and
itself while driving due to the wind. There is risk
hold. The windows are lowered,
of injuries or risk of property damage. Make
the convertible top is closed and
sure that the convertible top is always com‐
the windows are raised again
pletely open or closed.◀
while the switch is being held.
Preventing an interruption
The following requirements must be fulfilled in
order to be able to move the convertible top. Press and hold the switch, until the convertible
top is fully open or closed. A Check Control
▷ The ignition or radio-ready state must be
message is displayed when the opening proce‐
switched on.
dure has finished.
50
The convertible top movement is interrupted if Before closing

the switch is released. The sequence can be 1. Lower the windows completely.
continued in the desired direction using the
2. Switching off the ignition.
switch.
3. Take the hexagon wrench and screwdriver
Operate switch again until the convertible op‐
out of the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to
eration is terminated.
page 220.
Operating from the outside
Unlocking the convertible top
When equipped with Comfort Access the con‐
1. Loosen and remove the screw on both
vertible top can also be operated from outside.
sides of the vehicle using the hexagon
▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 35, via wrench.
the remote control.
▷ Convenient closing, refer to page 35, via
the remote control.
▷ Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer
to page 39.
Cargo area partition

With the convertible top closed, the cargo area
volume can be expanded.
Expanding the cargo area volume, refer to 2. On the left side of the vehicle only: raise the
page 170. cover and pull the sensor outward and off.
Manually closing the convertible top
General information
If the convertible top has an electrical malfunc‐
tion, it can be closed manually. Two persons
are necessary to do this.
If possible, have a convertible top manually
closed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. 3. Raise the cover on both sides of the vehicle,
then slide it under the trim, first toward the
Safety information
WARNING
In case of an electrical malfunction, the
convertible top cannot be locked in the fully
open position. The convertible top will rise up
while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of an
accident. Do not open the closed convertible
top manually.◀
51
inside, arrow 1, and then toward the front, Swivel the cable out sideways so it cannot
arrow 2. be pinched.
4. Turn the cover under the trim as far out‐

ward as possible. Closing the convertible top
1. Grasp the convertible top with two people,
with both hands on the two side frames.
2. Lift out the convertible top simultaneously
on both sides and swivel forward onto the
windshield panel.
To take out the convertible top, pull force‐
fully on the side frame. Begin with an up‐
ward movement and then change to a for‐
ward movement.
5. Loosen and remove the two screws on both
sides of the vehicle using the hexagon
wrench.
3. In the vehicle, lift the cover in the center of

the roof using the screwdriver. Apply the
screwdriver to the recesses, arrows.
6. Only on the left side of the vehicle: slightly
lift the side frame, arrow 1, and pull the
sensor with the cable forward out from the
guide, arrow 2.
52
4. For this purpose, insert the hexagon Wind deflector

wrench into the designated receptacle in
the center of the roof and press push up‐
The concept
ward, arrow 1.
The wind deflector reduces the air movement
Turn the hexagon wrench counterclockwise
in the vehicle interior when driving with the
to open the side frame lock.
convertible top down.
Safety information
NOTE
When moving the front seats back, the
wind deflector can be damaged. There is a risk
of property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement is clear prior to moving the front
seats back.◀
5. Pull of the locking elements from the pins WARNING

on the left and right side of the side frames, Body parts can be jammed on operating
arrow. the wind deflector. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement around
the wind deflector is clear when installing and
removing it and folding it up.◀
WARNING
Objects placed on the installed wind de‐
flector can be thrown into the vehicle's interior
or endanger other traffic participants, e.g., in
case of an accident, braking or evasive maneu‐
ver. The objects can damage the wind deflec‐
6. Insert the pins on the side frames into the
tor. There is a risk of injury or risk of property
receptacles on the windshield frame.
damage. Do not place any objects on the instal‐
led wind deflector.◀
Installation
The wind deflector is located in a protective
jacket in the cargo area.
To protect the head restraints from damage,
slide the rear head restraints into the upper po‐
sition prior to installation and removal.
7. Turn the hexagon wrench clockwise to 1. Take the wind deflector out of the protec‐
close the side frame lock. tive jacket.
8. Continue turning the hexagon wrench

clockwise to close the sliding sun roof.
53
Fully unfold the wind deflector so that the Press the wind deflector downward, while
handle, arrow 1, folds down and locks the inserting the pins in the corresponding fix‐
wind deflector. ing points, arrows 2.
2. Open the rear side window, if necessary. 5. Press the wind deflector downward in the
Insert wind deflector from one side of the middle, until the handle engages, arrows 1.
vehicle with the pins in the corresponding Grasp the inner framework of the wind de‐
fixing points on the opposite side of the ve‐ flector and fold it up, arrow 2.
hicle.
Removing
3. To release the lock, fold the handle up and
hold it. Proceed in reverse sequence.
4. Press the wind deflector inwardly and up,

arrow 1, to the extent that the wind deflec‐
tor can be positioned in front of the fixing
points on the installation side.
Release the handle.
54
Settings CONTROLS
Settings
With a backrest inclined too far to the
tions rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
This chapter describes all standard, country- cannot be ensured anymore. There is a risk of
specific and optional features offered with the sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
series. It also describes features that are not There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
to the selected options or country versions. This backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tion as possible and do not adjust again while
tems. When using these functions and systems, driving.◀
observed. WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
Sitting safely property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
An ideal seating position that meets the needs justment.◀
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. Adjusting seats
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally, Overview
observe the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 57.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 59.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 109.
Front seats
Safety information
1 Forward/backward
WARNING
2 Thigh support
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
3 Height
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐ 4 Backrest tilt
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
55
CONTROLS Settings
Forward/backward Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine
are supported for upright posture.
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired

direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages prop‐
erly. Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease
the curvature.
Height
Thigh support
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as

needed to reach the desired height. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Backrest tilt
Entering the rear
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
56
Settings CONTROLS
WARNING Front seat heating

Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to an unlocked Overview
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the backrests
before driving.◀
Fold down seat back

1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
2. Fold backrest forward. The maximum temperature is reached when
3. Push the seat forward. three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
Original position nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
The driver's seat features a mechanical mem‐ tomatically with the temperature selected last.
ory function for forward/back and backrest ad‐ When GREEN Mode, refer to page 179, is acti‐
justment. vated, the heater output is reduced.
1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐
tion. Switching off
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. Press and hold the button, until the
If the backrest is folded back when the seat is LEDs go out.
not yet in the original position, the seat latches
in the current position. In this case, manually
adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 56.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
57
CONTROLS Settings
added protection, they are not a substitute for Have the safety belts checked after an accident
safety belts. at the dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder fied service center or repair shop.◀
when fastening it.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will Correct use of safety belts
be correct for adult seat occupants of every ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and as tight
build if the seat is correctly adjusted. to your body as possible over your lap and
shoulders.
Safety information ▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
WARNING your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
If the safety belt is used to buckle more
than one person, the protective effect of the ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow fragile objects.
more than one person to wear a single safety ▷ Avoid thick clothing.
belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
occupant's lap, but must be transported and ward around your upper body.
secured in designated child restraint systems.◀
WARNING Buckling the seat belt

The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
The protective effect of the safety belts the belt buckle.
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
Unbuckling the safety belt
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way. 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
soiled. 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were mechanism.
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean.
58
Settings CONTROLS
Rear belt guide Safety information

WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury. Before driving, install
the head restraints on the occupied seats. En‐
sure that the middle of the head restraint sup‐
ports the back of the head approximately at
eye level.◀
When fastening the safety belts on the rear
seats, make sure that the belt guide loop is WARNING
closed. Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat when moving the head restraint.◀
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ WARNING
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety Objects on the head restraint reduce the
belts are positioned correctly. The protective effect in the head and neck area.
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above There is a risk of injury.
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be acti‐ ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
vated if objects are placed on the front passen‐
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
ger seat.
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
Front head restraints restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
Correctly adjusted head restraint while driving.◀
General information Adjusting the height: John Cooper

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the Works sport seat
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐
of an accident. justed.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjust the head restraint via the backrest tilt as
needed.
59
CONTROLS Settings
To adjust the height: basic seat Rear head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
push the head restraint down. approximately at eye level.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
Safety information
Removing: John Cooper Works sport WARNING
seat A missing protective effect due to re‐
The head restraints cannot be removed. moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
To remove: basic seat There is a risk of injury. Before driving, install
the head restraints on the occupied seats. En‐
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sure that the middle of the head restraint sup‐
sitting in the seat in question.
ports the back of the head approximately at
eye level.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
1. Fold the seat backrest forward if needed. Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
There is a risk of injury.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
head restraint out completely.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
60
Settings CONTROLS
Adjusting the height Safety information

WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.,
while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1 Adjusting 61
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out 62
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to Slide the switch.
page 169, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist‐ Adjusting electrically
ance.
Press button.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
The mirror moves in accordance with
head restraint out completely.
the button movement.
Mirrors Adjusting manually

In case of an electrical malfunction, press the
Exterior mirrors edges of the mirror.
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
61
CONTROLS Settings
Folding in and out 2. Engage selector lever position R.

NOTE
Deactivating
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
position.
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Press button.
Flip lever
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Fold the mirrors in and out is advantageous in
the following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ To reduce the blinding effect of the interior rear
matically at a speed of approx. view mirror, flip the lever forward.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Turn knob
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror, refer to page 63, are used to control
this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.
62
Settings CONTROLS
Interior mirror, automatic dimming Adjusting

feature
Overview
1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Fold the lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
Photocells are used for control:
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
▷ In the mirror glass. tion.
▷ On the back of the mirror. 4. Fold the lever back.
5. Switch off the ignition again if needed.
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
63
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Safety information system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can Safety information
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ WARNING
tions: The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The protective effect of the safety belts
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows. can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
▷ Using vehicle equipment. belt can cause additional injuries, for instance
in the event of an accident or during braking
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju‐
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ ries or danger to life. Secure children shorter
hicle. Take the remote control with you when than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ systems.◀
Always transport children in the rear Children on the front passenger seat
seat
General information
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
Accident research shows that the safest place front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
for children is in the rear seat. knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
Transport children younger than 13 years of side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
seat in suitable child restraint systems designed page 111.
for the age, weight and size of the child. Chil‐
dren 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
64
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Safety information the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
WARNING
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
Active front-seat passenger airbags can adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
injure a child in a child restraint system when move them.◀
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
On the rear seats
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀ In order to facilitate the installation of a back-
facing child restraint system:
WARNING Move the front passenger's seat as far up as
The stability of the child restraint system possible before folding down the backrest.
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child On the front passenger seat
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits Deactivating airbags
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
WARNING
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats Active front-seat passenger airbags can
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible, injure a child in a child restraint system when
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐ the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
move them.◀ jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Installing child re‐ After installing a child restraint system in the

front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
straint systems knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
General information
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
Pay attention to the specifications of the child tomatically, refer to page 111.
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Seat position and height
In order to faciliate the installation of a back- Before installing a child restraint system, move
facing child restraint system in the rear: the front passenger seat as far back as possible
Move the front passenger's seat as far up as and adjust its height to the highest and thus
possible before folding down the backrest. best possible position for the belt and to offer
optimal protection in the event of an accident.
Safety information If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
WARNING cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
The stability of the child restraint system move the passenger seat carefully forward until
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat the best possible belt guide position is reached.
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
65
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Child seat security Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
2. Remove the child restraint system.
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten
child restraint systems. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information Position
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. The corresponding symbol shows the
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐ Seats equipped with lower anchors are
turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐ marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
straint fixing systems. bols. It is not recommended to use the
inner lower anchors of standard outer
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint sys‐
The lower anchors may be used to attach the tem on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child belt instead for the middle seat.
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses. Before installing LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
Safety information Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
WARNING straint system.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems
are not correctly engaged, the protective effect Assembly of LATCH child restraint
of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can systems
be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger 1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐ turer's information.
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐ 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the erly connected.
backrest.◀
Upper LATCH retaining strap
For Canadian customers Only.
66
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
The following statement is required by Trans‐

port Canada:
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child re‐
straint system, nor a booster cushion, requiring
the use of a tether strap can be properly se‐
cured in the vehicle.
67
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and op‐ To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
tions electronic systems/power consumers.
specific and optional features offered with the Ignition off
series. It also describes features that are not Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
to the selected options or country versions. This Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ position P, press the Start/Stop button again
tems. When using these functions and systems, without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
observed.
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
Start/Stop button electronic systems/power consumers.
The concept The ignition is switched off automatically in the

following situations while the vehicle is station‐
Pressing the Start/Stop button ary and the engine is off:
switches the ignition on or off
▷ During locking, also with the low beams ac‐
and starts the engine.
tivated.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
gine starts in selector lever posi‐
completely, so that the engine can still be
tion P or N with the brake pedal pressed when
started. This function is only available when
you press the Start/Stop button.
the low beams are turned off.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with the
▷ When opening and closing the driver door,
clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop but‐
if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
ton is pressed.
the low beams are turned off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
Ignition on with driver's door open and low beams off.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐ ▷ When the front doors are opened if there is
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal. no other person sitting in the front seats.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop ▷ The low beams switch to parking lights af‐
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at ter approx. 15 minutes of no use.
the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Radio ready state
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length of General information
time. In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐
sumers remain ready for operation.
68
Driving CONTROLS
Activating WARNING
With the engine running, press the Start/Stop An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
button. and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
If the engine is not running and the ignition is dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
switched on, the system automatically activates rolling.
the radio-ready state when the door is opened In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
if the lights are switched off or the daytime run‐ against rolling away, observe the following:
ning lights are activated. ▷ Set the parking brake.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
stance the ignition is automatically switched off turn the front wheels in the direction of the
for the following reasons: curb.
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
▷ When automatically switching from low chock.◀
beams to parking lights. NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
Switching off automatically or repeated starting in quick succession, the
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐ fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
cally in the following situations: The catalytic converter can overheat. There is a
▷ After approx. 8 minutes. risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central ing in quick succession.◀
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged Steptronic transmission
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
Starting the engine 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
Safety information brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
DANGER starts.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can Manual transmission
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐ Starting the engine
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐ 1. Depress the brake pedal.
haust gases can also accumulate outside of the 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐ tral.
haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
tion.◀
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
69
CONTROLS Driving
Engine stop Steptronic transmission
Safety information Switching off the engine

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the
WARNING
parking brake.
Unattended children or animals can
2. Engage selector lever position P.
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
tions: The engine is switched off.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. The radio-ready state is switched on.
Manual transmission
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. Switching off the engine
▷ Using vehicle equipment. 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Start/Stop button.
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ The engine is switched off.
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
The radio-ready state is switched on.
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
WARNING 3. Set the parking brake.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against Auto Start/Stop function
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Concept
against rolling away, observe the following: The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
▷ Set the parking brake. The system switches off the engine during a
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
turn the front wheels in the direction of the lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
curb. engine starts again automatically for driving off.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, After every start of the engine using the Start/
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
chock.◀ the last selected state, refer to page 72. When
the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is avail‐
Before driving into a car wash able when the vehicle is traveling faster than
about 3 mph/5 km/h.
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic Depending on the selected driving mode, refer
car wash, refer to page 237. to page 129, the system is automatically acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically during
a stop under the following conditions:
70
Driving CONTROLS
Manual transmission: ▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐

▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is ture.
not pressed. ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the steering wheel is being turned.
driver's door is closed. ▷ After driving in reverse.
Steptronic transmission: ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ matic climate control is switched on.
tion D. ▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the ▷ At higher elevations.
vehicle is stopped. ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the ▷ The parking assistant is activated.
driver's door is closed.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
In order to be able to release the brake pedal,
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position R, N
engage lever in position P. The engine remains
or M/S.
off.
To continue driving depress the brake pedal. Starting the engine
When a gear is engaged, the engine starts au‐
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
tomatically.
lowing conditions:
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
when the engine is switched off.
pressed.
Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
brake pedal.
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
for an Automatic engine start.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
The display indicates that the
the following conditions are met:
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
Functional limitations length of time.
The engine is not switched off automatically in The engine can only be started via the Start/
the following situations: Stop button.
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ Functional limitations
matic climate control is running. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
or cooled to the required level. lowing situations:
71
CONTROLS Driving
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior Switching off the vehicle during an
when the cooling function is switched on. automatic engine stop
▷ The steering wheel is turned. During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐ can be switched off permanently, for instance
tor lever position D to R, N or M/S. when leaving it.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐ Steptronic transmission:
tor lever position P to R, N, D or M/S. 1. Engage selector lever position P.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
matic climate control is switched on. deactivated.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low. 3. Set the parking brake.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when Manual transmission:
the heating is switched on.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
▷ Manual transmission: low brake vacuum switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
pressure; this can occur, for example, if the deactivated.
brake pedal is depressed a number of times
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
in succession.
3. Set the parking brake.
Switching the system on/off Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Using the button Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, as it is detected that no driver is present.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s
Press button. service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is

deactivated.
Parking brake
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
Safety information
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button. WARNING
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
tivated. and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
72
Driving CONTROLS
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Turn signal, high beams,
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
headlight flasher
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Turn signal
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb. Using turn signals
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian Press the lever past the resistance point.
models The lever returns into its starting position after
actuation.
If for once use during driving is required, en‐ To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
gage the parking brake slightly and hold the the resistance point.
button down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
Triple turn signal activation
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking The turn signal flashes three times.
brake is set. The function can be activated or deactivated.
Releasing
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide to flash.
the lever down.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
73
CONTROLS Driving
High beams, headlight flasher Switching on

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance

▷ High beams on, arrow 1. point.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. ▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
Wiper system beyond the resistance point.
General information Wipers change to normal speed when vehi‐
cle comes to standstill.
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
them to become worn more quickly. sition when released.
Safety information Switching off and brief wipe

WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE Press the lever down.

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, ▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper down twice.
motor can overheat when switching on. There
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
is a risk of property damage. Defrost the wind‐
press down once.
shield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
74
Driving CONTROLS
Interval mode or rain sensor Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset. Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Safety information
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
NOTE sensor.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. sensor.
There is a risk of property damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Windshield washer system
Activating/deactivating Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
Press button on the wiper lever. the wash pump cannot work as intended.
Wiping is started. There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
LED in wiper lever lights up. ervoir is empty.◀
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐

tion is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
75
CONTROLS Driving
Cleaning is a risk of property damage. Defrost the wind‐

shield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly
vertical position
Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-away position of the wipers 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐
der frosty conditions, e.g.
Safety information
WARNING
Folding down the wipers
If the wipers start moving in the folded
After the wipers are folded back down, the
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
wiper system must be reactivated.
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the shield.
wipers are in the folded away state and the 2. Switch on the ignition.
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
NOTE their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
76
Driving CONTROLS
Washer fluid add silicon-containing additives to the washer

fluid.◀
General information NOTE
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ Mixing different windshield washer con‐
voir. centrates or antifreeze agents can damage the
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washing system. There is a risk of property
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield damage. Do not mix different windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can washer concentrates or antifreeze agents. Ob‐
be used. serve the information and mixing ratios pro‐
Recommended minimum fill quantity: vided on the containers.◀
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Overview
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual gine compartment.
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the Malfunction
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
tainer. centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate to incorrect readings at temperatures below
or the equivalent is recommended.◀ +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on Manual transmission
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add Safety information
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ WARNING
ervoir.◀ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
NOTE dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
Silicon-containing additives in the washer rolling.
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win‐ In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
dows can lead to damage to the washing sys‐ against rolling away, observe the following:
tem. There is a risk of property damage. Do not
77
CONTROLS Driving
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

turn the front wheels in the direction of the turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb. curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀ chock.◀
NOTE
Selector lever positions
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk Drive mode D
of property damage. When shifting into 5th or
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.◀
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
Shifting
Reverse R
General information
Engage selector lever position R only when the
The engine speed during shifting is adjusted vehicle is stationary.
automatically for harmonious and dynamic
gear shifting. Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without en‐
Reverse gear
gine power in selector lever position N, for in‐
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. stance in vehicle washes.
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift
lever dynamically to the left and engage re‐ Parking position P
verse gear with a forward shifting movement. Selector level position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
wheels in selector lever position P.
Steptronic transmission Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Concept
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the hicle may begin to move.
possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Engaging selector lever positions
Safety information
WARNING General information
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐ select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against brake pedal until you are ready to start.
rolling. The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the
against rolling away, observe the following: engine is running.
78
Driving CONTROLS
With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake Activating the sport program
pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐
tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be
deactivated and the shift command will not be
executed.
Releasing the selector lever lock

A lock prevents the inadvertent switching to se‐
lector lever position R or the inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐

tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Ending the Sport program

To release the lock: with the brake pedal de‐ Push the selector lever to the right.
pressed, press the button on the front of the D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
selector lever, see arrow.
Manual mode M/S
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
Concept
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal be‐ Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
yond the resistance point at the full throttle po‐ mode.
sition.
Activating manual mode
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts
up later and the shifting times are shorter.
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐

tor lever position D, arrow 1. Next, push the se‐
lector lever forward or pull it backward, ar‐
row 2.
79
CONTROLS Driving
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear General information
is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ Shifting
ment cluster, for instance M1. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for instance downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
Shifting
To shift down: press the selector lever forward. Switching into manual mode
To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
The Steptronic transmission continues shifting paddle switches into manual mode perma‐
automatically in certain situations, for instance nently.
when certain engine speed limits are reached. In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode temporarily.
Avoiding automatic upshifting
Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S Switching into automatic mode
manual mode is automatically upshifted as In selector lever position D, after conservative
needed. driving in manual mode without acceleration or
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission, shifting via the shift paddles for a certain
automatic shift operations are not performed if amount of time, the transmission switches back
one of the following conditions is met: to automatic mode.
▷ DSC is deactivated. It is possible to switch from manual mode into
▷ TRACTION is activated. the automatic mode as follow:
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
down. ▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
With the respective transmission version, the paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left Shifting
shift paddles. This is not possible by switching
briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever
position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport

transmission ▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
Concept
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
hands on the steering wheel.
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
80
Driving CONTROLS
Displays in the instrument cluster 3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit, refer to page 220, press the
The selector lever position is dis‐
yellow release lever downward, see arrow.
played, for example P.
Manually release the transmission lock

If the selector lever is locked in selector lever
position P despite the ignition being turned on,
the brake pedal being depressed and the but‐
ton on the selector lever being pressed, the
transmission lock can be unlocked manually:
4. Move the selector lever slightly toward the
Before unlocking the transmission lock man‐
rear; to do this press the button on the
ually, engage the parking brake forcefully to
front of the selector lever.
prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
Release the release lever.
1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve together
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po‐
with the lower retaining ring and, if re‐
sition.
quired, the MINI Driving Modes switch from
the center console. To do so, pull the re‐ For additional information, see the chapter on
taining ring and, if required, the MINI Driv‐ tow-starting and towing.
ing Modes switch upward at the rear edge.
Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch
Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector,
component wear since this function represents
if needed.
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 174, period.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
81
CONTROLS Driving
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button and select SPORT with

the MINI Driving Modes switch.
The instrument cluster displays TRACTION
in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF
indicator light lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the
resistance point at the full throttle position,
kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control was used, the transmis‐
sion must cool down for approx. 5 minutes, be‐
fore Launch Control can be used again.
After using Launch Control

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
82
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Tachometer 88 4 Fuel gauge 88

2 Indicator/warning lights 5 Display/reset miles 88
3 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 84
83
CONTROLS Displays
Electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems Onboard computer 92

Messages, for instance Check Control 2 Selector lever position 78
Time 88 Gear shift indicator 90
External temperature 88 3 MINI Driving Modes switch status 129
Selection lists 92 Status
Total miles/trip odometer 88
Check Control Indicator/warning lights
Concept General information

The indicator and warning lights can light up in
The Check Control system monitors functions in
a variety of combinations and colors.
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems. Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
General information engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS Red lights
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
Safety belt reminder
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output Indicator lamp flashes or illuminates:
and a SMS text message may appear on the safety belt on the driver or front pas‐
Control Display. senger side is not buckled. The safety
84
Displays CONTROLS
belt reminder can also be activated if objects Orange lights

are placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned Active Cruise Control
correctly. The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
Airbag system Camera-based cruise control, refer to
page 131.
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified Indicator lamp illuminates: a vehicle has
service center or repair shop. been detected ahead of you.
Indicator lamp flashes: the conditions
Parking brake are not adequate for the system to work.
The parking brake is set. The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
Release the parking brake, refer to
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
page 73.
pedal.
Yellow lights
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance Anti-lock Braking System ABS
warning is issued, for example when Braking force boost may not be work‐
there is the impending danger of a colli‐ ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
sion or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too ger braking distance into account.
small.
Have the system immediately checked
Increase distance. by a dealer’s service center or another
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐ qualified service center or repair shop.
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle
approaches another vehicle at a relatively high DSC Dynamic Stability Control
differential speed.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
Intervention by braking or make an evasive
the drive and braking forces. The vehi‐
maneuver.
cle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
adapt driving style to the driving circumstances.
Pedestrian warning The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
If a collision with a person detected in tioned.
this way is imminent, the symbol lights Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
up and a signal sounds. center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 127.
85
CONTROLS Displays
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated Steering system

or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
Steering system in some cases not
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐ working.
vated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control Have the steering system checked by a
is activated. dealer’s service center or another qualified
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to service center or repair shop.
page 127, and DTC Dynamic Traction Control,
refer to page 128.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
tire inflation pressure in a tire. sible.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. cumstances:
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 117. This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
The indicator light illuminates. tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low can seriously damage emission control
tire inflation pressure or a flat tire. components, in particular the catalytic con‐
Observe the information in the Check Control verter.
message.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
The indicator light flashes and then illuminates
page 219.
continuously.
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can Rear fog light
be detected.
Rear fog lights are activated.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ Rear fog lights, refer to page 106.
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again. Green lights
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again. Turn signal
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is Turn signal switched on.
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
service center or another qualified service light indicates that a turn signal bulb
center or repair shop as needed. has failed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a Turn signal, refer to page 73.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 113.
86
Displays CONTROLS
Parking lights, headlight Continuous display

Parking lights or headlights are acti‐ Some Check Control messages are displayed
vated. continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
Parking lights/low beams, headlight
occur at once, the messages are displayed con‐
control, refer to page 103.
secutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
Front fog lights 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
Front fog lights are activated. again automatically.
Front fog lights, refer to page 106.
Temporary display
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
High-beam Assistant
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are
High-beam Assistant is switched on. stored and can be displayed again later.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐ Displaying stored Check Control
uation. messages
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 105. Via the onboard monitor:
1. "Vehicle info"
Cruise control 2. "Vehicle status"
The system is switched on. It maintains 3. "Check Control"
the speed that was set using the control 4. Select the SMS text message.
elements on the steering wheel.
Display
Blue lights
Check Control
High beams At least one Check Control message is
High beams are activated. displayed or is stored.
High beams, refer to page 74.
SMS text messages
Hiding Check Control messages SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indi‐
cator and warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Press and hold button on signal lever.
87
CONTROLS Displays
Symbols Odometer and trip odom‐

Within the supplementary text, the following
functions can be selected independent of the
eter
check control message.
Concept
▷ Display additional information about
The total number of kilometers driven and the
the Check Control message in the Inte‐
number of kilometers driven since the last reset
grated Owner's Manual.
are displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or another Reset the trip odometer
qualified service center or repair shop.
Press the knob.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
▷ The odometer is displayed
Contact Roadside Assistance. when the ignition is switched
off.
Messages after trip completion ▷ When the ignition is switched
Special messages displayed while driving are on, the trip odometer is re‐
displayed again after the ignition is switched set.
off.
Fuel gauge External temperature

Vehicle tilt position may cause WARNING
the display to vary. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
The arrow beside the fuel pump there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
symbol shows which side of the or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Notes on refueling, refer to page 188.
If the indicator drops to
When the reserve fuel level is reached, +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
the yellow indicator lamp is illuminated.
A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
There is an increased risk of ice
Tachometer on roads.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning

field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine. Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set via the on‐
board monitor.
88
Displays CONTROLS
Date Current fuel consump‐

The date is displayed in the in‐ tion
strument cluster.
The date can be set via the on‐ The concept
board monitor. Displays the current fuel consumption. Check
whether you are currently driving in an efficient
and environmentally-friendly manner.
Range
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is 1. "Settings"
displayed briefly. 2. "Instrument cluster"
▷ The remaining range is 3. "Current consumption"
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for example Service requirements
taking curves aggressively, the engine func‐
tion is not always ensured. Concept
The function displays the necessary service re‐
The Check Control message appears continu‐
quirements and the corresponding mainte‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
nance procedures.
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km General information
it is possible that the engine will no longer have After the ignition is turned on the instrument
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured cluster briefly displays available driving distance
anymore. There is a risk of property damage. or time to the next scheduled maintenance.
Refuel promptly.◀ A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Displaying the cruising range
Via the onboard monitor: Display
1. "Settings" Detailed information on service

2. "Instrument cluster" requirements
3. "Range" More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
89
CONTROLS Displays
Required maintenance procedures and le‐ General information

gally mandated inspections are displayed. Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ try-specific version, the gear shift indicator is
tion. active in the manual mode of the Steptronic
transmission and with manual transmission.
Symbols Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Symbols Description
No service is currently required. Manual transmission: displaying
Example Description
The deadline for scheduled Fuel efficient gear is set.
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing. Shift into fuel efficient gear.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Steptronic transmission: displaying

Entering appointment dates
Example Description
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections. Fuel efficient gear is set.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are

set correctly.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required" Speed Limit Info
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:" Speed Limit Info
6. Adjust the settings.
Concept
7. Confirm.
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
The entered date is stored. permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
Gear shift indicator The camera at the base of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
The concept well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
The system recommends the most fuel efficient signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
gear for the current driving situation. tions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
90
Displays CONTROLS
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐

ing on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the navi‐
gation data and also displays speed limits pres‐
ent on routes without signs.
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐
ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traf‐
fic signs with speed limitations are detected
and displayed only. Speed limitations due to Press button on the turn signal lever several
entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. times, if needed.
are not displayed. Speed limits with extra text
Speed limit detection is displayed on the CID
characters are always displayed.
(central information display) in the instrument
cluster.
Safety information
WARNING Speed Limit Info
The system does not release from the The last speed limit detected.
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
Without a navigation system the
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
traffic signals are grayed out af‐
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
ter curves or longer stretches of
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
roadway.
tervene in the respective situations.◀
With navigation system: speed
Overview limit detection is not available.
Camera
Without navigation system: no

speed limit or cancellation is de‐
tected.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the

Head-up Display.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. System limits

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ The system may not be fully functional and
terior mirror clean and clear. may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Display ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

Speed limit detection is displayed via the on‐ ▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
board computer. by objects, stickers or paint.
91
CONTROLS Displays
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in Activating a list and adjusting the
front of you. setting
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
Button the steering wheel Function
reflections.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior Activate the respec‐
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a tive list and select the
sticker, etc. desired settings.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera. Confirm the selection.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ Display
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs are detected valid for a parallel
road.
Onboard computer
Selection lists Concept
The onboard computer displays different vehi‐
General information cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐
With the buttons on the steering wheel and the age values.
display in the instrument cluster the following
can be displayed or operated: Calling up information on the info
▷ Current audio source. display
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Press and hold button on blinker lever.
92
Displays CONTROLS
Information is displayed in the info display of Via the onboard monitor:

the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
Information at a glance
3. Select the desired information.
CID (central information display) Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
Information in detail
the following information in the
CID (central information display):
Range
▷ Range.
Displays the estimated cruising range available
▷ GREEN Info. with the remaining fuel.
When GREEN Mode is activated. It is calculated based on your driving style over
▷ Average fuel consumption. the last 20 miles/30 km.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
GREEN info
▷ Average speed.
The achieved range extension may be dis‐
▷ Date. played as a bonus range.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Always Open Timer. Average fuel consumption
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐ This is calculated for the period while the en‐
play and navigation: gine is running.
Distance to destination. The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
When destination guidance is activated in
onboard computer.
the navigation system.
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐ Average speed
play and navigation:
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
Time of arrival. engine manually stopped are not included in
When destination guidance is activated in the calculation of the average speed.
the navigation system.
▷ Speed Limit Info. Resetting average values
▷ Speed.
The unit of some information can be changed.
Setting units, refer to page 97.
Selecting information
You can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the CID
(central information display) of the instrument
cluster. Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
93
CONTROLS Displays
Engine temperature display With equipment version with Head-up

Displays the current engine temperature, based Display and navigation: distance to
on a combination of coolant and engine oil destination
temperature. As soon as the optimum operat‐ The distance remaining to the destination is
ing temperature has been attained, the indica‐ displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
tor is in the center position. gation system before the trip is started.
If the engine oil or coolant, thus the engine, be‐ The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
come too hot, a Check Control message is dis‐ tomatically.
played.
When the engine temperature is too
With equipment version with Head-up
high, a red indicator lamp is displayed.
Display and navigation: time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
When the engine oil temperature is too destination is entered in the navigation system
high, a red indicator lamp is displayed. before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 216.
Speed Limit Info
Always Open Timer
Further information, see chapter Speed Limit
The Always Open Timer displays the current Info.
driving time and total driving time with the
convertible top open in minutes and hours. Onboard computer on the Control
Always Open Timer via the onboard monitor, Display
refer to page 100.
Concept
Resetting the Always Open Timer The onboard computer displays different vehi‐
cle data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
General information
The vehicle features two types of onboard
computers.
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
fuel consumption, are displayed. The values
can be reset individually.
Resetting the current driving time: press button ▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
on the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds view of a certain distance and can be reset
with the driving times displayed. as often as necessary.
Calling up the onboard computer or trip

computer
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
94
Displays CONTROLS
Resetting the onboard computer Vehicle state

Via the onboard monitor: The following vehicle and surrounding area
data is automatically checked and evaluated in
1. "Vehicle info"
succession:
2. "Onboard info"
▷ Range.
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
▷ Engine temperature.
4. "Yes"
▷ External temperature.
Resetting the trip computer ▷ SPORT program state.
Via the onboard monitor: Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is
displayed.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer" Checking vehicle state
3. "Reset": all values are reset. Via the onboard monitor:
"Automatically reset": all values are reset 1. "Vehicle info"
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come
2. "Driving Excitement"
to a standstill.
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
Driving Excitement 1. Activate SPORT.
The concept
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
On the Control Display, sport instruments can
be displayed, and the vehicle condition can be
checked before the use of the SPORT program.
Speed warning
Sport instruments
On the Control Display, values for power and
Concept
torque are displayed. A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
Displaying sport instruments
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
1. "Vehicle info" drops below the set speed limit once by at least
2. "Driving Excitement" 3 mph/5 km/h.
3. "Sports instruments"
Displaying, setting or changing the
Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
speed warning
1. Activate SPORT. Via the onboard monitor:
1. "Settings"
3. "Sports instruments"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
95
CONTROLS Displays
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed 5. Press the Controller.
warning is displayed. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
5. Press the controller. nutes are displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
The time is stored.
warning
Via the onboard monitor: Setting the time format
1. "Settings" 1. "Settings"
2. "Speed" 2. "Time/Date"
3. "Warning" 3. "Format:"
4. Press the controller. 4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Setting your current speed as the speed
warning Date
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Select current speed"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
Settings on the Control 5. Press the Controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
Display
and year.
Time The date is stored.
Setting the time zone Setting the date format

1. "Settings" 1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date" 2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:" 3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired time zone. 4. Select the desired format.
The time zone is stored. The date format is stored.
Setting the time Language

1. "Settings"
Setting the language
2. "Time/Date"
1. "Settings"
3. "Time:"
2. "Language/Units"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
3. "Language:"
are displayed.
4. Select the desired language.
96
Displays CONTROLS
Settings are stored for the profile currently Basic displays

used. Basic functions, for example the tachometer,
can be set to be displayed continually if so de‐
Setting the voice dialog sired.
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 27. Event displays
Functions that are only displayed temporarily,
Units of measurement for example the volume or temperature set‐
tings, can be set as event displays.
Setting the units of measurement
Several vehicle assistance functions can also be
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ displayed on the LED ring. This display corre‐
distance and temperature: sponds with the displays of the function in the
1. "Settings" respective display.
2. "Language/Units"
Example: tachometer
3. Select the desired menu item.
Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster,
4. Select the desired unit. the light animations of the tachometer's basic
Settings are stored for the profile currently display show the current RPMs and the respec‐
used. tive RPM warning margins.
Brightness. Display
Setting the brightness

To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the Controller. ▷ Arrow 1: current RPM.
Settings are stored for the profile currently ▷ Arrow 2: prewarning field.
used. ▷ Arrow 3: warning field.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible. Switching on/off LED ring
1. "Settings"
LED ring on the central
2. "Center Instrument"
instrument cluster 3. "Center Instrument"
The concept
The LED ring displays light animations to repre‐
sent specific functions.
97
CONTROLS Displays
Adjusting the LED ring projection screen is clear during opening and
Via the onboard monitor: closing.◀
1. "Settings" NOTE
2. "Center Instrument" The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
3. "Basic display" or "Event display" components that can easily be scraped or dam‐
aged. There is a risk of property damage. Do
4. Select the desired setting. not place any objects on the Head-up Display,
attach to system components or plug into the
Setting the brightness system. Do not move the moving parts man‐
The brightness can be adjusted when night ually.◀
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
Via the onboard monitor: Overview
1. "Settings"
2. "Center Instrument"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Head-up Display
Switching on/off
Concept When switching on, the projection lens of the
This system projects important information into Head-up Display is extended. When switching
the driver's field of vision, for instance the off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display
speed. is retracted again.
The driver can get information without averting

his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display. For additional information, see the
chapter on care.
Safety information
WARNING Press button.
When extending and retracting the pro‐

jection screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
98
Displays CONTROLS
Display Settings are stored for the profile currently

used.
Overview
The following information is displayed on the Adjusting the height
Head-up Display: Via the onboard monitor:
▷ Speed. 1. "Settings"
▷ Navigation system. 2. "Head-Up Display"
▷ Check Control messages. 3. "Height"
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. 4. Turn the controller until the desired height
▷ Driver assistance systems. is reached.
Some of this information is only displayed 5. Press the controller.
briefly as needed. Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display Setting the rotation
Via the onboard monitor: The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
1. "Settings" tated around its own axis.
2. "Head-Up Display" Via the onboard monitor:
3. "Displayed information" 1. "Settings"

4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up 2. "Head-Up Display"
Display. 3. "Rotation"
Settings are stored for the profile currently 4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
used. is selected.
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
used.
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted. Display visibility
Via the onboard monitor: The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
1. "Settings" play is influenced by the following factors:
2. "Head-Up Display" ▷ Certain sitting positions.
3. "Brightness" ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐

play.
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
5. Press the controller. ▷ Wet roads.

When the low beams are activated, the bright‐ ▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
ness of the Head-up Display can be additionally
influenced using the instrument lighting, refer
to page 107.
99
CONTROLS Displays
John Cooper Works: sport displays in Functional requirements

the Head-up Display ▷ Steptronic transmission:
Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy‐
General information
namic Traction Control DTC are activated.
The sport displays in the Head-up Display assist
▷ Press the accelerator pedal all the way
with a sporty driving style.
down.
Switching on
Switching on
Shift point indicators are displayed in the Head-
1. "Settings" up Display if the sport displays, refer to
2. "Head-Up Display" page 100, are switched on.
3. "Displayed information" Via the onboard monitor:
4. "Sport displays" 1. "Settings"

With navigation system: if the sport displays are 2. "Head-Up Display"
switched on, no navigation content will be dis‐ 3. "Displayed information"
played on the Head-up Display.
4. "Sport displays"
Display
Display
Successive gray illuminated fields indicate the
upcoming shift moment.
Shift up immediately when the red fields light
up.
When the permitted maximum speed is
reached, all shift point indicators flash.
When the maximum speed is exceeded, the
supply of fuel is interrupted in order to protect
1 Speed the engine.
2 Shift point indicator
3 Gear display
Always Open Timer
4 Current engine speed
5 Warning field, speed Concept
The Always Open Timer displays the driving
Shift point indicator times with open convertible top on the Control
Display and in the onboard computer, refer to
Concept page 92.
Shift point indicator in the Head-up Display in‐
dicates the optimum shifting point. Thus, with a
General information
sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle With the respective equipment, the Always
acceleration is achieved. Open Timer can also be displayed as light ani‐
100
Displays CONTROLS
mation on the LED ring of the central instru‐ Overview

ment cluster.
Displaying the Always Open Timer

1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Always Open"
Display
The following information is displayed on the
Control Display:
▷ Current driving time with the convertible 1 Engine oil pressure display
top open in minutes and hours. 2 Display of turbocharger boost
▷ Total driving time with the convertible top 3 Time/stop watch
open in minutes and hours.
▷ Current external temperature while driving Engine oil pressure
with the convertible top open.
The current engine oil pressure is displayed. At
Maximum 99 hours and 59 minutes are dis‐ low temperatures, there can be an increase in
played for the current driving time, and maxi‐ the engine oil pressure.
mum 999 hours and 59 minutes for the total
driving time. Turbocharger boost
The current boost of the engine's turbocharger
Reset the current driving time
is displayed.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Always Open" Stop watch
3. "Reset trip"
General information
To reset the total driving time, contact your
service center. The stop watch contains the following features:
▷ Measuring the total time.
▷ Measuring and storing of up to nine lap
Chrono package in the times.
cockpit ▷ Displaying the time.
The red indicator light indicates that the
Concept stop watch is active.
The Chrono package consists of three display
instruments in the cockpit, where the engine oil
pressure, the turbocharger boost, and the time
are displayed. In addition, intermediate and to‐
tal times can be measured using a stop watch.
The display elements of the Chrono package
mainly support a sporty driving style, e,g, on
racetracks.
101
CONTROLS Displays
Overview, buttons watch, for example, LAP 1 with the meas‐

ured time. The stop watch continues run‐
ning in the background.
3. If needed, press button, arrow 3, again to
measure a further lap time.
Calling up lap times

1. Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until
LAP 1 is shown on the display.
2. Press button, arrow 2, to call up the individ‐
▷ MODE button, arrow 1. ual lap times.
▷ START/STOP button, arrow 2.
Deleting lap times
▷ RESET/LAP buttons, arrow 3.
1. Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until
Displaying the measured times LAP 1 is shown on the display.
The times measured using the stop watch are 2. Press button, arrow 3, to delete all stored
shown in minutes and seconds on the display. lap times.
For times greater than 60 minutes, the num‐
bers of hours and the minutes with seconds are Displaying the time
alternatively displayed. The time is copied from the instrument cluster.
If the stop watch is running, the seconds are Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until the time
also shown using a seconds pointer in the scale is displayed.
of the display element.
Measuring the total time

1. Press button, arrow 2, to start the stop
watch.
2. Press button, arrow 2, again to stop the
stop watch.
Lap times
General information
It is possible to measure and store up to nine
lap times. Older lap times are overwritten.
Measuring and storing a lap time

1. Press button, arrow 2, to start the stop
watch.
2. Press button, arrow 3, to measure and store
a lap time.
The lap time is briefly shown in the display
and via the seconds pointer of the stop
102
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle features and op‐ Symbol Function
tions Lights off

Daytime running lights
specific and optional features offered with the Parking lights
to the selected options or country versions. This Low beams
the applicable laws and regulations must be Instrument lighting
observed.
Overview
Parking lights, corner‐
Switches in the vehicle ing lights and roadside
parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The exterior lighting is automatically switched
off at these switch settings if the driver's door is
opened when the ignition is switched off.
The light switch element is located next to the

Parking lights
steering wheel. Position of switch:
Symbol Function The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
Rear fog lights
ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
Front fog lights
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking lamp, refer to page 104.
Automatic headlight control
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
103
CONTROLS Lights
Roadside parking lights 3. "Welcome lights"

Concept rently used.
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
Switching on
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the vehi‐
cle's radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for 3. "Pathway lighting:"
approx. 2 seconds. 4. Set length of time.
Switching off rently used.
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Automatic headlight
control
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy de‐ Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
lay feature matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
Welcome lights
there is precipitation.
General information
General information
Depending on the equipment, when switching
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
off the vehicle, switch position or .
cause the lights to be switched on.
Depending on the ambient brightness, individ‐
ual light functions may be switched on briefly, Activating
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Position of switch:
Activating/deactivating The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched
on.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
104
Lights CONTROLS
System limits Malfunction

The automatic headlight control cannot serve A Check Control message is displayed.
as a substitute for your personal judgment of Cornering light is malfunctioning or has failed.
lighting conditions. Have the system immediately checked by a
For example, the sensors are unable to detect dealer’s service center or another qualified
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under service center or repair shop.
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights compensate for ac‐
Daytime running lights
celeration and braking operations in order not
to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
General information
optimum illumination of the roadway.
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is High-beam Assistant
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion . The concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
Activating/deactivating
participants early on and automatically
In some countries, daytime running lights are switches the high beams on or off depending
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ on the traffic situation. The assistant ensures
vate the daytime running lights. that the high beams are switched on, whenever
Via the onboard monitor: the traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on by
1. "Settings"
the system.
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps" General information
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐ The system responds to light from oncoming
rently used. traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for instance in towns
and cities.
Cornering light The high beams can be switched on and off at
any time as usual.
General information
Position of switch:
When going around corners, the cornering light
also lights the interior area of the curve. Below
a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h when the
turn signal is switched on and the steering an‐
gle is detected, there is automatic activation.
105
CONTROLS Lights
Activating/deactivating and wagons; when driving close to train or

ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position or .
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, arrow. Fog lights
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
Front fog lights
beams are switched on.
Functional requirement
The headlights are automatically switched be‐ The low beams must be switched on.
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐ Switching on/off
ment cluster lights up when the system Press button. The green indicator light
switches on the high beams. lights up.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when If the automatic headlight control, refer to
manually switching the high beams on and off, page 104, is activated, the low beams will
refer to page 74. come on automatically when you switch on the
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press front fog lights.
the button on the turn signal lever. When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
System limits on.
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of Rear fog lights
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations Functional requirement
where required to avoid a safety risk. The low beams or front fog lights must be
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐ switched on.
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary: Switching on/off
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, Press button. The yellow indicator light
such as fog or heavy precipitation. lights up.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
page 104, is activated, the low beams will
106
Lights CONTROLS
come on automatically when you switch on the To switch off permanently: press the button for
rear fog lights. approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Instrument lighting Switching the reading lights on and off

manually
Settings Press button.
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust Reading lights are located in the front next to
the brightness. the interior light.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel. Ambient light
General information
Depending on your optional features lighting
Interior lights can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
General information Activating/deactivating

Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy
lights are controlled automatically. 1. "Settings"
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ 2. "Lighting"
trols brightness of some of these features. 3. "Ambient:"
Overview
rently used.
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back: man‐
ual color change.
Push and hold the switch forward or

back: automatic color change. Push
the switch again to end color changes.
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
Depending on the equipment, the brightness of
3 Ambient light the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
Switching interior lights on/off the Control Display.
manually Via the onboard monitor:
Press button. 1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
107
CONTROLS Lights
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
108
Safety CONTROLS
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 3 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Knee airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐ side of the body in the chest, lap, and head
pacts in which safety belts alone would not pro‐ area.
vide adequate protection.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
109
CONTROLS Safety
Protective action ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ other objects on the front passenger seat
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end that are not specifically suited for seats with
collisions. integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
Information on optimum effect of the jackets, over the backrests.
airbags ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
WARNING nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
the dashboard, and the seats.
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐ ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
tended and may cause additional injuries due Even when you follow all instructions very
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ closely, injury from contact with the airbags
ger to life. Follow the information on optimum cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
protective effect of the airbag system.◀ The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; therefore,
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
contact MINI Customer Relations or your au‐
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
thorized MINI service center.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as Warnings and information on the airbags are
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ also found on the sun visors.
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
Functional readiness of the airbag
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
system
in the floor area and does not support them
on the dashboard.
Safety information
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐ WARNING
mals or objects between an airbag and a Individual components can be hot after
person. triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or nents.◀
modify them in any way.
WARNING
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
Improperly executed work can lead to
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on spective accident severity. There is a risk of
the front passenger side as a storage area. injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
110
Safety CONTROLS
ped by a dealer’s service center or another Malfunction of the automatic

qualified service center or repair shop.◀ deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
Correct function the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
When the ignition is switched on, the
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
airbags lights up.
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag In this case, change the sitting position so that
system and the belt tensioner. the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
Airbag system malfunctioning
the person sit in the rear.
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on. To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
Automatic deactivation of the front-
less they are specifically determined to be
seat passenger airbags
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
The concept ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
The system reads if the front passenger seat is passenger seat if a child restraint system is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ to be installed on it.
sistance. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ could press against the seat from below.
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
vated.
Indicator light for the front-seat
General information passenger airbags
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc‐
tions for children on the front passenger seat,
see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐ The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be airbags indicates the operating state of the
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries front-seat passenger airbags.
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐ The light indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.◀ ther activated or deactivated.
111
CONTROLS Safety
▷ The indicator light lights up An appropriate Check Control message is dis‐

when a child is properly played.
seated in a child restraint fix‐
1. Move the respective seat all the way for‐
ing system or when the seat
ward.
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not 2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
activated. moves forward briefly.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
for instance a correctly seated person of The calibration procedure is completed when
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The the Check Control message disappears.
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
tivated. peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
Detected child restraint systems
peat calibration, have the system checked as
The system generally detects children seated in soon as possible.
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured.
After installing a child restraint system, make Rollover protection sys‐
sure that the indicator light for the front-seat tem
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that
the child restraint system has been detected The concept
and the front-seat passenger airbags are not The rollover protection system is automatically
activated. activated in the event of a sufficiently serious
accident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted ex‐
Strength of the driver's and front-seat cessively. The safety frames located behind the
passenger airbag rear headrests extend within fractions of a sec‐
The explosive power that activates driver's/ ond.
front passenger's airbags very much depends Supplementing the reinforced front windshield
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐ frame, the rollover protection system further in‐
er's seat. creases passenger safety.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon General information
as a relevant Check Control message is dis‐ Do not place any objects on the covers of the
played. A message also appears on the Control rollover protection system.
Display.
Safety information
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
WARNING
There can be damage or injuries when
There is a risk of jamming when moving the rollover protection system is triggered.
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
property damage. Make sure that the area of age. Make sure that the area of movement of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ the rollover protection system is clear.◀
justment.◀
112
Safety CONTROLS
WARNING Malfunction
Improperly executed work can lead to A Check Control message is displayed
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering when there is a malfunction.
of the system. In the case of a malfunction, the
system could not trigger as intended in the
event of an accident despite respective acci‐
dent severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ Tire Pressure Monitor
ger to life. Have the system checked, repaired,
TPM
dismantled and scrapped by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
The concept
pair shop.◀
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
WARNING the four mounted tires. The system warns you if
After triggering or damage, system func‐ there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
tionality is limited or not available anymore. more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. valves measure the tire inflation pressure.
Have the system checked and replaced by a
General information
service center or repair shop in the event of With use of the system observe further infor‐
triggering of or damage to the system.◀ mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 192.
WARNING
With an extended rollover protection sys‐ Functional requirements
tem, the area of movement of the convertible The system must have been reset with the cor‐
top is limited. There is risk of injuries or risk of rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable
property damage. When the rollover protection signaling of tire pressure loss is not assured.
system is extended, do not move the converti‐ Reset the system after each adjustment of the
ble top.◀ tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Overview Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
sure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
for instance whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle info"
Covers of the rollover protection system 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The status is displayed.
113
CONTROLS Safety
Status control display After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
Tire and system status are indicated by the short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
color of the tires and a SMS text message on accepted as reference values. The resetting
the Control Display. process is completed automatically while driv‐
ing. After successful completion of the reset,
All wheels green the tires appear in green on the Control Display
and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is dis‐
System is active and will issue a warning based
played.
on the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset. The progress of the reset is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
One wheel is yellow you continue the reset resumes automatically.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. Messages
All wheels are yellow Required tire inflation pressure check

message
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ The system has detected a wheel
Wheels, gray change, but no reset was done.
The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a ▷ No reset was performed for the system. The
malfunction. system issues a warning based on the tire
inflation pressures stored during the last re‐
Status information set.
The status control display additionally shows ▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the specifications.
actual values read; they may vary depending
on driving style or weather conditions. A Check Control message is displayed.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen be‐
Resetting the system low the level of the last reset.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or In these cases:
wheel change. 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
Via the onboard monitor: needed.
1. "Vehicle info" 2. Perform a system reset.
2. "Vehicle status"
Message in case of low tire pressure
3. "Perform reset"
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using
"Perform reset". A Check Control message is displayed.
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is
▷ There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
displayed.
114
Safety CONTROLS
▷ No reset was performed for the system. The low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
system issues a warning based on the tire tinued driving with these tires.◀
inflation pressures stored during the last re‐
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
set.
Dynamic Stability Control.
In these cases:
1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately. Actions in the event of a flat tire
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h. Normal tires
2. At the next opportunity, e.g., gas station, 1. Identify the damaged tire.
check and correct the tire inflation pressure Check the air pressure in all four tires, for
in all four tires, if necessary. instance using the tire pressure gage of a
3. Reset the system. tire repair kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
Message in case of sharp tire inflation correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
pressure loss have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
A symbol with the affected tires will be
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
displayed in the Check Control mes‐
center or another qualified service center or
sage.
repair shop.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐ 2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
flation pressure. repair kit or by changing the tire.
▷ No reset was performed for the system. The Use of sealant, for instance from the tire repair
system issues a warning based on the tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
inflation pressures stored during the last re‐ this case, have the electronics checked and re‐
set. placed at the next opportunity.
In these cases:
Run-flat tires
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ Maximum speed
vers.
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 200, are la‐ Continued driving with a flat tire
beled with a circular symbol containing the If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
WARNING vers.
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a next opportunity.
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
115
CONTROLS Safety
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is System limits

correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not The system does not function properly if a reset
have been reset. In this case, perform the has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is re‐
reset. ported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐
Possible driving distance with complete loss of rect.
tire inflation pressure: The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
The possible driving range varies depending on temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun
the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., will increase the tire's temperature, thus in‐
speed, road conditions, external temperature. creasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire in‐
The driving range may be less but may also be flation pressure is reduced when the tire tem‐
more if an economical driving style is used. perature falls again. These circumstances may
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight cause a warning when temperatures fall very
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐ sharply.
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km. The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently, damage caused by external circumstances.
for instance it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different Malfunction
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving The yellow warning lamp flashes and
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ then lights up continuously. A Check
neuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance Control message is displayed. No flat
curbs, potholes, etc. tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
WARNING Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
Your vehicle handles differently with a
runflat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐ ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics, for exam‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐ ple an emergency wheel, is mounted: Have
duced, braking distances are longer and the it checked by a dealer’s service center or
self-steering properties will change. There is a another qualified service center or repair
risk of an accident. shop as needed.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of ▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
50 mph/80 km/h.◀ dealer’s service center or another qualified
Final tire failure ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire. ▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
ing the area of the interference, the system
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
automatically becomes active again.
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS
service center or another qualified service cen‐ 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ter or repair shop.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
116
Safety CONTROLS
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle FTM Flat Tire Monitor

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
The concept
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the The system does not measure the actual infla‐
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As tion pressure in the tires.
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been It detects a tire inflation pressure loss by com‐
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐ paring the rotational speeds of the individual
tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure wheels while moving.
telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi‐ In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, detected and reported as a flat tire.
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the Functional requirements
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un‐
The system must have been initialized when
der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
every tire or wheel change.
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in‐
flation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
Status display
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when be displayed on the Control Display, for in‐
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS stance whether or not the FTM is active.
malfunction indicator is combined with the low Via the onboard monitor:
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
1. "Vehicle info"
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
The status is displayed.
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
Initialization
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐
tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐ When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐ serve as reference values in order to detect a
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning the inflation pressures.
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction Do not initialize the system when driving with
telltale after replacing one or more tires or snow chains.
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐ Via the onboard monitor:
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly. 1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
117
CONTROLS Safety
3. "Perform reset" The system could be delayed or malfunction in

4. Start the engine but do not drive off. the following situations:
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
6. Drive away. ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time. ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes. ▷ When driving with snow chains.
Indication of a flat tire Actions in the event of a flat tire

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Normal tires
Check Control message is displayed.
1. Identify the damaged tire.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.
inflation pressure.
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. kit.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
vers. correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with been initialized. In this case, initialize the
normal tires or run-flat tires. system.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 200, are la‐ If identification of flat tire damage is not
beled with a circular symbol containing the possible, please contact a dealer’s service
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
WARNING
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g. with a tire repair kit
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ or by changing the tire.
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
Run-flat tires
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if Maximum speed
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐ You may continue driving with a damaged tire
tinued driving with these tires.◀ at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ Continued driving with a flat tire
bility Control is switched on if needed. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
System limits 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all vers.
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external next opportunity.
circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
vance. correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
118
Safety CONTROLS
been initialized. In this case, initialize the Intelligent Safety

system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of The concept
tire inflation pressure:
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
The possible driving range varies depending on the driver assistance system.
the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
The intelligent safety systems can help prevent
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
an imminent collision.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used. ▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 120.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐ ▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km. tion, refer to page 123.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently,

Safety information
for instance it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different WARNING
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving Indicators and warnings do not relieve
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
neuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
curbs, potholes, etc. tem may not be output or they may be output
WARNING too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
Your vehicle handles differently with a
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
runflat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the WARNING
self-steering properties will change. There is a
Due to system limits, individual functions
risk of an accident.
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
50 mph/80 km/h.◀ e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Final tire failure Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
119
CONTROLS Safety
Overview Front-end collision

Button in the vehicle warning with City Brak‐
ing function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
Intelligent Safety button The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the
Switching on/off base of the mirror.
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ The front-end collision warning is available
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐ even if cruise control has been deactivated.
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting. With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
Press button briefly: are delayed in order to avoid false system reac‐
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety tions.
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐ General information
cording to their respective settings. The system warns at two levels of an imminent
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective danger of collision at speeds from approx.
to their individual settings. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are the current driving situation.
stored for the driver profile currently in use. Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:

switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
120
Safety CONTROLS
Detection range Overview
Button in the vehicle
Objects that the system can detect are taken

into account.
Intelligent Safety button
Safety information
WARNING Camera
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing view mirror.
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
Switching on/off
tow-starting/towing.◀
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
121
CONTROLS Safety
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective Prewarning

to their individual settings. This warning is issued, for example, when there
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are is the impending danger of a collision or the
stored for the driver profile currently in use. distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
Press button again: is a prewarning.
activated. Acute warning with braking function
▷ The LED lights up green. Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
Hold down button: proaches another object at a high differential
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are speed.
switched off. The driver must intervene actively when there
▷ The LED goes out. is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Setting the warning time
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
The warning time can be set via the onboard
previous forewarning.
monitor.
1. "Settings" Braking intervention
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
3. Activate the desired warning time on the to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
Control Display. ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster
is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step‐
The selected warning time is stored for the ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist
driver profile currently in use. with some braking intervention if there is risk of
a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
Warning with braking function come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
Display
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
A warning symbol appears in the instrument be shut down.
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent. The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
Symbol Measure
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning. The braking intervention can be interrupted by
Brake and increase distance. stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
signal sounds: acute warning.
of the detection range and functional restric‐
You are requested to intervene by tions are to be considered.
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
122
Safety CONTROLS
System limits Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are,
Safety information the more warnings are displayed. However,
WARNING there may also be an excess of false warnings.
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Observe the Person warning with City
information regarding the system limits and ac‐ light braking function
tively intervene, if needed.◀
The concept
Detection range The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐
The system's detection potential is limited. destrians.
Thus a system reaction might not come or The system issues a warning in the city driving
might come late. speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
tected: function.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach A camera at the base of the rearview mirror
them at high speed. controls the system.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
General information
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
Functional limitations before a collision.
The system may not be fully functional in the The system reacts to people who are within the
following situations: detection range of the system.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall. Detection range
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
ately after vehicle delivery. The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐ ided into two areas:
cause of oncoming light, for instance from ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
the sun low in the sky. vehicle.
123
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and Camera

left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
Indicators and warnings do not relieve view mirror.
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐ Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
tem may not be output or they may be output terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐ Switching on/off
vene in the respective situations.◀ Switching on automatically
WARNING The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐ Press button briefly:
ing function. There is a risk of an accident. ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to system is displayed. The systems
tow-starting/towing.◀ are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
Overview ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Button in the vehicle Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:

activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:

Intelligent Safety button switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
124
Safety CONTROLS
Warning with braking function Detection range

The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
Display ited.
If a collision with a person detected in this way Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the sued late.
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
The red symbol is displayed and a signal tected:
sounds. ▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
Intervene immediately by braking or ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
make an evasive maneuver. because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
Braking intervention ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself 32 inches/80 cm.
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster Functional limitations
is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step‐
The system may not be fully functional or may
ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist
not be available in the following situations:
with some braking intervention if there is risk of
a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
come to a complete stop. fall.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ ▷ In tight curves.

vention up to a complete stop, the engine may ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
be shut down. windshield are dirty or covered.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
The braking intervention can be interrupted by gine via the Start/Stop button.
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
moving the steering wheel. ately after vehicle delivery.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
of the detection range and functional restric‐ cause of oncoming light, for instance from
tions are to be considered. the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
System limits
Safety information
Brake force display
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at Concept
all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ac‐
The additional brake lamps tell following traffic
cidents or risk of property damage. Observe the
that an emergency braking procedure is being
information regarding the system limits and ac‐
performed. This helps to reduce the risk of a
rear-end collision.
125
CONTROLS Safety
General information Interrupting automatic braking

It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, e.g., for an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ During normal brake application, the brake

lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the flash‐
ers additionally light up.
Post Crash — iBrake

Depressing the brake pedal can cause the vehi‐
cle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also
interrupts automatic braking.
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically with‐
out intervention by the driver in certain situa‐
tions. This can reduce the risk of a further colli‐
sion and the consequences thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released au‐
tomatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
Harder vehicle braking

It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker.
Here, a higher braking pressure must be gener‐
ated for a short period when pressing the brake
pedal than during automatic braking. This in‐
terrupts automatic braking.
126
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and op‐ DSC Dynamic Stability
tions Control
The concept
series. It also describes features that are not Within the physical limits, the system helps to
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
to the selected options or country versions. This ing engine speed and by applying brakes to the
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ individual wheels.
the applicable laws and regulations must be General information
observed. Dynamic Stability Control detect for example
the following unstable driving conditions:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
Anti-lock Braking System ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheel, which
ABS can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
page 128, is a version of the DSC where for‐
braking.
ward momentum is optimized.
The vehicle contains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing Safety information
active safety.
WARNING
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine. The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
Brake assistant situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
automatically produces the greatest possible traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ spective situations.◀
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided Indicator/warning lights
by ABS.
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal the drive and braking forces.
for the duration of the emergency stop.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
127
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF The system ensures maximum headway on

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐ special road conditions, for example unplowed
duced during acceleration and when driving in snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with
curves. somewhat limited vehicle stability.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
as soon as possible. mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Deactivating DSC Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
Press and hold this button but not lon‐ You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the under the following special circumstances:
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. snow-covered roads.
DSC is switched off. ▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose grounds.
Activating DSC ▷ When driving with snow chains.
Press button.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator Traction Control
lamp go out.
Activating DTC
Indicator/warning lights Press button.
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
in the instrument cluster. ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐ OFF lights up.
activated.
Deactivating DTC
Automatic activation Press button again.
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
occurs in the following situations: lamp go out.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode. Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
DTC Dynamic Traction
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
Control individually when a sporty driving style is used.
The concept
DTC is a version of the DSC where forward mo‐
mentum is optimized.
128
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Dynamic Damping Con‐ With each starting operation, MID is activated

using the Start/Stop button.
trol
GREEN
Concept
The tuning of the suspension can be changed Concept
with the system. GREEN, refer to page 179, provides consistent
The system offers several different programs. tuning to maximize range.
The programs are selected via the MINI Driving
Modes switch. Activating GREEN
Turn MINI Driving Modes switch to the right un‐
Programs til GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.
MID/GREEN Configuring GREEN

Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for
more comfort. Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activate GREEN.
SPORT 2. "Configure GREEN"
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐ 3. Configure the program.
ers for greater driving agility.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
MINI Driving Modes Via onboard monitor:

switch 1. "Settings"
2. "GREEN Mode"
Concept
or
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose 1. "Settings"
between three different programs. The MINI 2. "Driving mode"
Driving Modes switch will activate the particular 3. "Configure GREEN"
program.
Configure the program.
Operating the programs This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
MINI Driving Modes switch Program
MID SPORT
GREEN
Concept
SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for
greater driving agility.
With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of
MID the suspension also changes and SPORT can be
For balanced tuning. individually configured.
129
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
The configuration is stored for the driver profile Selected program

currently in use.
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Activating SPORT
Turn MINI Driving Modes switch to the left until
SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT Display on the onboard monitor

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, Program changes can be displayed on the on‐
when the display is activated on the Control board monitor.
Display, the SPORT driving mode can be config‐
ured for individual specifications. 1. "Settings"
Activate SPORT. 2. "Control display"
Select "Configure SPORT". 3. "Driving mode info"
Configure the program.

SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
Drive-off assistant
vated:
1. "Settings" The concept

2. "Driving mode" This system supports driving off on inclines. The
3. "Configure SPORT" parking brake is not required.
This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is

Driving off with the drive-off assistant
activated.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
programs in Driving mode: out delay.
▷ GREEN, refer to page 129. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
▷ SPORT, refer to page 129.
For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐
sions, the possible holding duration amounts to
Displays
2 minutes.
Program selection
With the MINI Driving Modes
switch turned on a list of pro‐
grams is displayed and can be
selected.
130
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and op‐ Safety information
tions WARNING
The system does not release from the
This chapter describes all standard, country- personal responsibility to correctly assess the
specific and optional features offered with the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
series. It also describes features that are not tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
to the selected options or country versions. This the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, spective situations.◀
observed. WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
Camera-based cruise con‐ an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
trol traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
Concept WARNING
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐ Risk of accident due to too high speed
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using differences to other vehicles, e.g., in the follow‐
the buttons on the steering wheel. ing situations:
The system maintains the desired speed on ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving ve‐
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle accel‐ hicle.
erates or brakes automatically.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system lane.
adjusts the speed of your vehicle within the
given system limits so that the set distance to ▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
the vehicle ahead is maintained. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective the respective situations.◀
speed.
General information
A camera on the interior rear view mirror is
used to detect vehicles driving ahead.
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
131
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Overview Functional requirements
Buttons on the steering wheel Speed range

The system is best used on well-constructed
Press button Function
roads.
Cruise control on/off, refer to The system is functional at speeds beginning at
page 132. approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Store/maintain speed, refer to The max. speed that can be set is
page 133. 85 mph/140 km/h.
Pause cruise control, refer to Active cruise control is paused below approx.
page 132. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to
a stop.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 133.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise
Reduce distance, refer to control
page 133.
Switching on
Increase distance, refer to
page 133. Press button on the steering wheel.
Increase speed, refer to

Display in the instrument cluster lights
page 133.
up.
Reduce speed, refer to page 133.
Display in the instrument cluster lights
up. The current speed is adopted as de‐
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's ser‐ sired speed and displayed with symbol.
ies, optional features and country specifica‐
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
tions.
speed.
Camera DSC will be switched on if needed.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is

deleted.
Interrupting manually
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ Interrupting automatically
terior rearview mirror clean and clear. The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
132
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
▷ Manual transmission: when the clutch mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
pedal is depressed for a few seconds or re‐ or button: hold down to repeat the ac‐
leased while a gear is not engaged. tion.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
Adjusting distance
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
Safety information
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
WARNING
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
paired, for instance by soiling, heavy pre‐ The system does not release from the
cipitation or glare effects from the sun. personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, braking can be late. There is a risk of acci‐
▷ If the vehicle in front decelerates below a dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
Setting the speed maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
bly by braking.◀
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press or button in the interrupted state.
Reduce distance
When the system is switched on, the current
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
sired distance is set.
speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the The set distance is briefly displayed in
symbol. the left part of the instrument cluster.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
The speed can also be stored as follows:

Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
Press button.
sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in

Changing the speed
the left part of the instrument cluster.
or button: press until the desired speed
is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
Continuing cruise control
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
by calling up the stored speed.
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx. Make sure that the difference between current
1 mph/1 km/h. speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
past the point of resistance, the desired
133
In the following cases, the stored speed value is ▷ Display lights up green: system is active, the
deleted and cannot be called up again: display indicates the desired speed.
▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
▷ When the ignition is switched off. rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
Calling up stored speed and distance ▷ No display: system is switched off.
Press button with the system inter‐ If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
rupted. Cruise control is continued with conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
the saved values. The selected distance is rently fulfilled.
briefly displayed in the CID (central information
display). Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance from the vehicle driving
Switching distance control on/off ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐
tion of the CID (central information display).
Safety information Distance display
WARNING
Distance 1
The system does not react to traffic driv‐
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is a risk of accidents or risk Distance 2
of property damage. Adjust the desired speed
to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.◀
Distance 3
Switching distance control off
Press and hold this button.
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after
Or:
the system is switched on.
Press and hold this button.
Detected vehicle
The indicator lamp in the instrument
Symbol lights up orange:
cluster lights up.
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
To switch distance control back on, press one of you.
the two buttons again briefly.
After changing over distance control, a Check Indicator/warning lights
Control message is displayed.
Symbol flashes orange:
Displays in the instrument cluster The conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
Desired speed and stored speed The system was deactivated but applies the
In addition to the indicator lamp, the brakes until you actively resume control by
desired speed is displayed in the central
information display.
134
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator ▷ For red traffic lights.

pedal. ▷ For cross traffic.
Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds: ▷ For oncoming traffic.
You are requested to intervene by brak‐ ▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
ing or make an evasive maneuver. lighting at night.
The system has been interrupted or dis‐ Swerving vehicles

tance control is temporarily suppressed
because the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐

pressed because the accelerator pedal
is being pressed; a vehicle was de‐
tected.
Displays in the Head-up Display A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
The information from Active Cruise Control can until it is completely within the same lane as
also be displayed in the Head-up Display. your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
System limits swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
Detection range tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, for ex‐
ample, when rapidly approaching a truck.
When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably
detected, the system requests that the driver
intervene by braking and carrying out evasive
maneuvers, if needed.
Cornering
The detection capacity of the system and the

automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Deceleration
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
lowing situations:
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow- speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
moving road users.
135
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
into a curve at an appropriate speed. fall.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted ▷ In tight curves.
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
be detected late or not at all. front windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
ately after vehicle delivery.
Cruise control
When you approach a curve the system may The concept
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
you may compensate it by briefly accelerating.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
After releasing the gas pedal the system is reac‐
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
tivated and controls speed independently.
needed.
Weather General information

In the event of unfavorable weather and light The system is functional at speeds beginning at
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush, approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐ Depending on the driving settings, the features
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐ of the cruise control can change in certain
tions for vehicles that are already detected. areas.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for Safety information
example by braking, steering or evading.
WARNING
Engine power The system does not release from the
The desired speed may not be maintained on personal responsibility to correctly assess the
uphill grades if engine power is insufficient. traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
Malfunction situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
tem fails or was automatically deactivated.
spective situations.◀
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations: WARNING
▷ When an object was not correctly detected. The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
136
▷ On winding roads. DSC will be switched on if needed.

▷ In heavy traffic.
Switching off
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface. Press button on the steering wheel.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐ The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
stant speed is possible.◀ deleted.
Overview Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on the
Buttons on the steering wheel steering wheel.
Press button Function

Automatic interruption
Cruise control on/off, refer to
The system is automatically interrupted in the
page 137.
Store speed, refer to page 137. ▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
Pause cruise control, refer to seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
page 137. gaged.
Continue cruise control with the ▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
last setting, refer to page 138. rent speed.
Increase speed, refer to ▷ If selector lever position N is set.

page 137. ▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
Reduce speed, refer to page 137.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
Setting the speed

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise
control
Maintaining/storing the speed
Switching on Press or button in the interrupted state.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
The stored speed is displayed in the instrument
cluster lights up.
cluster.
The current speed is adopted as the de‐ DSC will be switched on, if needed.
sired speed and is displayed with the The speed can also be stored as follows:
symbol in the instrument cluster.
Press button.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
137
Changing the speed Displays in the instrument cluster

or button: press until the desired speed
is set. Indicator lamp
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
road is clear. ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to tem is switched on.
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx. Desired speed and stored speed
1 mph/1 km/h.
The desired speed is displayed together
▷ or button: each time it is pressed with the symbol.
past the point of resistance, the desired
▷ Display lights up green: system is
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
active, the display indicates the de‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
sired speed.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
pends on the vehicle.
rupted, the display indicates the stored
▷ or button: pressing it to the resist‐ speed.
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
▷ No display: system is switched off.
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
button is released, the vehicle maintains its conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the rently fulfilled.
resistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
erate more rapidly. System limits
Continuing cruise control Engine power

The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
General information
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
An interrupted cruise control can be continued engine power is insufficient.
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before PDC Park Distance Con‐
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur. trol
Calling up stored speed The concept

PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is avail‐
The stored speed is reached and maintained. able - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
138
General information Overview

The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers. With front PDC: button in vehicle
The maneuvering range, depending on obsta‐
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at ap‐
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object. Park assistance button
▷ When a collision is imminent.

Ultrasound sensors
Safety information
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
WARNING for example in the bumpers.
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just the driving style to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely Functional requirements
and actively intervene in the respective situa‐ Ensure full functionality:
tions.◀
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
WARNING stickers, bicycle racks.
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐ ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
vated, the warning can be delayed due to phys‐
ical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or Switching on/off
risk of property damage. Avoid approaching an
object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Switching on automatically
is not yet active.◀ The system switches on automatically in the
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ With front PDC: when obstacles are de‐
tected behind or in front of the vehicle by
PDC and the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h.
139
With front PDC: automatic activation on obsta‐ The signal tone is switched off, when selector
cle detection can be switched off. Via the on‐ lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
board monitor: Steptronic transmission.
1. "Settings"
Volume
2. "Parking"
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
3. Select setting. entertainment volume can be adjusted.
The setting is stored for the driver profile Via the onboard monitor:
currently used.
1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or
Automatic deactivation during forward "Settings"
travel 2. "Tone"
The system switches off when a certain driving 3. "Volume settings"
distance or speed is exceeded. 4. "PDC"
Switch the system back on if needed. 5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Press park assistance button.
Visual warning
▷ On: the LED lights up.
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
▷ Off: the LED goes out. shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
The rearview camera image is displayed when farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the trol Display before a signal sounds.
park assistance button. A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
WARNING The range of the sensors is represented in col‐
ors: red, green and yellow.
Signal tones
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
When approaching an object, an intermittent
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the ve‐ "Rear view camera"
hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker. System limits
The shorter the distance to the object, the
Safety information
shorter the intervals.
WARNING
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is The system can react incorrectly or not at
sounded. all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Observe the
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐
information regarding the system limits and ac‐
cated both in front of and behind the vehicle,
an alternating continuous signal is sounded.
140
Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ In large buildings with right angles and

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under smooth walls, for instance in underground
the following circumstances: garages.
▷ For small children and animals. ▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐ ▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
stance coats. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ stance sweeping machines, high pressure
sound, for instance from passing vehicles or steam cleaners or neon lights.
loud machines. The malfunction is signaled by a continuous
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged tone alternating between the front and rear
or out of position. speakers. As soon as the malfunction due
to other ultrasound sources is no longer
▷ If cargo protrudes.
present, the system is again fully functional.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detec‐
treme heat or strong wind.
tion, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switch‐
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other ing on/off.
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. Malfunction
▷ With moving objects. A Check Control message is displayed in the in‐
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as strument cluster.
ledges or cargo. Red symbol is displayed, and the range
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences. PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
▷ For objects with porous surfaces. dealer’s service center or another qualified
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance service center or repair shop.
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Rearview camera
False warnings Concept
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐ The rearview camera provides assistance in
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐ parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
stacle within the detection range: behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
▷ In heavy rain. play.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
Safety information
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow. WARNING
▷ On rough road surfaces. The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
141
just the driving style to the traffic conditions. Automatic deactivation during forward
Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely travel
and actively intervene in the respective situa‐ The system switches off when a certain driving
tions.◀ distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Park assistance button Switching the view via the onboard

monitor
With PDC activated:
Camera "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
and trailers that are not connected to a
tailgate.
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If tions.
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Activating the assistance functions
Switching on/off More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
Switching on automatically ▷ Parking aid lines
The system is automatically switched on if se‐
"Parking aid lines"
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running. Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
142
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. Obstacle marking
Pathway lines
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image

of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐ Their colored margins of the obstacle markings
age of the rearview camera. match the markings of the PDC.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
Parking using pathway and turning
level roads.
radius lines
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
steering wheel movements.
parking space.
Turning circle lines
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where

the pathway line covers the corresponding
Turning circle lines can be superimposed on the turning radius line.
image of the rearview camera.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
143
Display settings This system assists the driver in parking parallel

to the road.
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on: General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
1. Select the symbol.
steps:
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
▷ Switching on and activating.
is reached and press the Controller.
▷ Parking space search.
Contrast ▷ Parking.
With the rearview camera switched on: Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
1. Select the symbol.
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
ble parking line and takes control of steering
is reached and press the Controller.
during the parking procedure.
System limits System status and instructions on required ac‐

tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Detection of objects A component of the parking assistant is the
Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects PDC Park Distance Control.
such as ledges may not be recognized by the
system. Safety information
Assistance functions also take into account data WARNING
of the PDC. The system does not release from the
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter. personal responsibility to correctly assess the
The objects displayed on the Control Display traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
may be closer than they appear. Therefore, do tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
not estimate the distance from the objects on situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the display. the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Parking assistant NOTE

The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
Concept cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis‐

tance Control applies in addition.
144
Overview Suitable parking space

▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min.
Button in the vehicle length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
Park assistance button
▷ The parking brake is released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
Ultrasound sensors driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button

The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search

is indicated on the Control Display.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the wheel housing. Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.
Ultrasound sensors The current status of the parking space search
Ensure full functionality: is indicated on the Control Display.
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with To activate: "Parking Assistant"

stickers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces

▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
145
Indicator on the Control Display Parking using the parking assistant
System activated/deactivated Parking
Symbol Meaning 1. Press park assistance button or shift

Gray: the system is not available. into reverse gear to switch the parking as‐
sistant on, refer to page 145. Activate the
White: the system is available but not
parking assistant, if needed.
activated.
Parking assistant is activated.
The system is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a
Parking space search and system status distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the display, refer to page 146.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of cated on the display.
the vehicle image; the parking assistant is
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
activated and the parking space search is
needed.
active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking Interrupting manually
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
time:
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted. ▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has ▷ "Parking Assistant"
been taken over by system.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
▷ Parking space search is always active following situations:
whenever the vehicle is moving forward ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ takes over steering.
activated. When the system is deactivated, ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
the displays on the Control Display are instruction on the display.
shown in gray.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
146
▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

surfaces. roads.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts ▷ On slippery ground.
or the time taken for parking is exceeded. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays parking space.
clearances that are too small. ▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ When switching into other functions of the ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
radio. of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Resuming Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ the following circumstances:
tinued, if needed. ▷ For small children and animals.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
page 145, and follow the instructions on the coats.
display.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
Switching off
machines.
The system can be switched off as follows:
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
▷ Press park assistance button. or out of position.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Switching off the ignition.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
System limits
treme heat or strong wind.
Safety information ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
WARNING
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ac‐ ▷ With moving objects.
cidents or risk of property damage. Observe the ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
information regarding the system limits and ac‐ ledges or cargo.
tively intervene, if needed.◀ ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
No parking assistance such as fences.
The parking assistant does not offer assistance ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
in the following situations:
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
▷ In tight curves. can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
Functional limitations
▷ The parking assistant may identify parking
The system may not be fully functional in the spaces that are not suitable for parking.
147
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending on
the tire size.
Malfunction
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
148
Climate control CONTROLS
Climate control
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings 6 Recirculated-air mode

2 Air flow 7 Rear window defroster
3 Temperature 8 Windshield defroster
4 Seat heating, right 57 9 Seat heating, left 57
5 Air conditioning
149
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control functions in detail The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐
ter, refer to page 176, that will exit from below
Switching the system on/off the vehicle.
Switching on Recirculated-air mode

Set any air volume.
Concept
Switching off You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
Turn wheel for air quantity to the
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
left until the control switches off.
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Operation
Temperature Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
Concept
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
The system provides heat depending on the
desired temperature. ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
Settings nently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-
Turn the ring to set the desired
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
temperature.
tain amount of time, depending on the external
temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
Air conditioning the fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
Concept air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
The air in the vehicle's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the tem‐ Controlling the air flow manually
perature setting, warmed again.
The vehicle's interior can only be cooled with Concept
the engine running. The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Switching on/off
Operation
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off. Turn the ring to set the desired
air flow.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may The higher the air flow, the more
fog up briefly when the engine is started. effective the heating or cooling
will be.
150
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ Windshield defroster
duced automatically to save battery power.
Press button.
Controlling the air distribution manually The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be Rear window defroster
adjusted manually. Press button. The LED lights up.
Operation The rear window defroster switches off

automatically after a certain period of time.
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐ When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐
termediate setting. put is reduced.
Microfilter
▷ Windows. In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
▷ Upper body region. crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
▷ Floor area. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐

nance, refer to page 218.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
Defrosting windows and removing

condensation
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐
crease the air flow and temperature, and if
needed, use the cooling function.
151
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left 9 Maximum cooling

2 Display 10 Air conditioning
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 11 Recirculated-air mode
4 AUTO program 12 Rear window defroster
5 Air distribution, manual 13 Windshield defroster
6 Display 14 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
7 Temperature, right sation
8 Seat heating, right 57 15 Seat heating, left 57
Climate control functions in detail Switching off

Turn wheel for air quantity to the
Switching the system on/off left until the control switches off.
Switching on
Set any air volume.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
152
by using the maximum cooling or heating Maximum cooling

power, and then keeps it constant.
Concept
Settings The system is set to the lowest temperature,
Turn the ring to set the desired maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
temperature.
General information
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
The automatic climate control reaches this engine running.
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
by increasing the cooling or heating output, gion. The vents need to be open for this.
and then keeps it constant.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ active.
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the Switching on/off
set temperature.
Press button.
Air conditioning The system is set to the lowest temper‐
ature, optimum air flow and air circulation
Concept mode.
The air in the vehicle's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the tem‐ AUTO program
perature setting, warmed again.
The vehicle's interior can only be cooled with Concept
the engine running. Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off. Press button.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
fog up briefly when the engine is started. intensity and outside influences, the air is di‐
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
cally with the AUTO program. body, and into the floor area.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐ The following features are switched on auto‐
densation water, refer to page 176, develops matically with the AUTO program:
and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐ ▷ The cooling function, refer to page 153.
mal.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
153
Intensity With constant recirculated-air mode, the air

With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
matic intensity control can be changed. the fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
Turn the ring to set the desired
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
intensity from soft to intensive.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The set intensity is displayed via the position of
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
the illuminated LED segment.
manually.
Convertible program
General information
When the convertible top is open, the converti‐
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
ble program is activated as well. In the conver‐
gram first.
tible program, the automatic climate control is
optimized for driving with the convertible top
Operation
open. In addition, the air flow is increased as
the vehicle speed increases. Turn the ring to set the desired
The efficiency of the convertible program can air flow.
be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐
flector.
Recirculated-air mode The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via

illuminated LED segments.
Concept The air flow of the automatic climate control
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ may be reduced automatically to save battery
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ power.
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the Controlling the air distribution manually
vehicle.
Concept
Operation The air distribution for climate control can be
Press button repeatedly to select an adjusted manually.
operating mode:
Operation
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
Press button repeatedly to select a
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply program:
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked. ▷ Upper body region.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated- ▷ Upper body region and floor area.
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐ ▷ Floor area.
tain amount of time, depending on the external
▷ Windows and floor area.
temperature.
154
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

area. In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
▷ Windows and upper body region. crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
▷ Windows. pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
Defrosting windows and removing nance, refer to page 218.
condensation
Concept Ventilation
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐ Setting
dows. The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed:
Switching on/off
▷ Direct ventilation:
Press button.
The air flow is directly pointed onto the per‐
The LED is illuminated with the system son. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,
switched on. depending on the adjusted temperature.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed ▷ Indirect ventilation:
from the windshield and the front side win‐
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air
dows.
is directly routed into the vehicle's interior.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active. Front ventilation
If the windows fog over, also switch on the
cooling function or press the AUTO button.
Windshield defroster
Press button.
The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster ▷ Turn knob for continuous opening and clos‐
ing of the vents.
Press button. The LED lights up.
▷ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the
The rear window defroster switches off
vent flow, arrows.
automatically after a certain period of time.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐

put is reduced.
155
Parked-car ventilation The system will only be switched on within the

next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset activation times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
trol flashes when the system has been switched
on.
156
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and op‐ programming and operation. Also follow the
safety instructions of the hand-held transmit‐
tions ter.◀
specific and optional features offered with the Compatibility
series. It also describes features that are not If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
to the selected options or country versions. This tem to be controlled, the system is gen‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ erally compatible with the Universal Integrated
tems. When using these functions and systems, Remote Control.
observed. If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Universal Integrated Re‐ ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
mote Control HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the Overview
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems, such as garage
door drives or lighting systems. The Universal
Integrated Remote Control replaces up to 3 dif‐
ferent hand-held transmitters. To operate the
remote control, the buttons on the interior mir‐
ror must be programmed with the desired
functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to pro‐
gram the remote control.
1 LED
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security. 2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Safety information
WARNING Programming
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the garage General information
door, using the integrated universal remote 1. Switch on the ignition.
control. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐ 2. Initial setup:
erty damage. Make sure that the area of move‐
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
ment of the respective system is clear during
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
157
CONTROLS Interior equipment
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all 2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
programming of the buttons on the interior radio system. Flashing and continuous illumina‐
mirror. tion of the LED will repeat for approximately
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ 20 seconds.
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system,
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the Universal Integrated Remote Control and
the interior mirror. The required distance the system also have to be synchronized.
depends on the hand-held transmitter. Please read the owner's manual to find out
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button how to synchronize the system.
of the desired function on the hand-held Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
transmitter and the button to be program‐ person.
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
Synchronizing the universal remote control
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
with the system:
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system.
rior mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at least mirror as described.
60 seconds, change the distance between 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
the interior mirror and the hand-held trans‐ on the system being programmed. You
mitter and repeat the step. Several more have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
attempts at different distances may be nec‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
attempts. and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
Canada: if programming with the hand- step up to three times in order to finish syn‐
held transmitter was interrupted, hold chronization. Once synchronization is com‐
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ plete, the programmed function will be car‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐ ried out.
mitter button for 2 seconds.
6. To program other functions on other but‐ Reprogramming individual buttons
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition.
The systems can be controlled using the interior 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
mirror buttons. be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
Special feature of the rolling code flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
wireless system mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
If you are unable to operate the system after prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
repeated programming, please check if the sys‐ the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
tem to be controlled features a rolling code ra‐ quired distance depends on the hand-held
dio system. transmitter.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press the
programmed button on the interior mirror lon‐
ger. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
158
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the 20 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ flashes rapidly. All stored functions will be de‐
mitter. leted. The functions cannot be deleted individ‐
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior ually.
mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED
flashing faster indicates that the button on
the interior mirror has been programmed. Digital compass
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior mirror. Overview
If the LED does not flash faster after at most
60 seconds, change the distance and re‐
peat the programming starting with step 4.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 sec‐
onds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐ 1 Control button
mitter button for 2 seconds.
2 Mirror display
Operation
WARNING Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the garage
door, using the integrated universal remote
control. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐ Operating concept
erty damage. Make sure that the area of move‐ Various functions can be called up by pressing
ment of the respective system is clear during the control button with a pointed object, such
programming and operation. Also follow the as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
safety instructions of the hand-held transmit‐ The following setting options are displayed in
ter.◀ succession, depending on how long the control
button is pressed:
The system, such as the garage door, can be
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
operated using the button on the interior mir‐
ror while the engine is running or when the ig‐ ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
nition is started. To do this, hold down the but‐ ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
ton within receiving range of the system until
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
the function is activated. The interior mirror
setting.
LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted. ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Deleting stored functions

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
159
Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure ▷ The point of the compass displayed does

1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ not change despite changing the direction
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set of travel.
compass zone appears in the mirror. ▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the Procedure
number of the compass zone that corre‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
sponds with your location appears in the objects or overhead power lines near the
mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ drive around in a circle.
pass is ready for use again after approximately 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
10 seconds. 3. Make sure that the convertible top is com‐
pletely closed.
Calibrating the digital compass
4. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
The digital compass must be calibrated in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on
event of the following: the display. Next, drive in a complete circle
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. at least once at a speed of no more than
4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful,
160
the "C" is replaced by the points of the Ashtray/cigarette

compass.
5. Open convertible top completely.
lighter
6. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ Overview
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on
the display. Next, drive in a complete circle
at least once at a speed of no more than
4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful,
the "C" is replaced by the points of the
compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup
Setting the language holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the
center console.
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but‐
ton again to switch between English "E" and Ashtray
German "O". In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash‐
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ tray from the cup holder.
mately 10 seconds.
Lighter
WARNING
Sun visor Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
Glare shield burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
To provide protection against glare, fold the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
sun visor down or pivot it to the side. the respective objects. There is a risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its handle.
Vanity mirror Make sure that children do not use the lighter
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ and burn themselves.◀
hind a cover.
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
161
Sockets In the center console
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the ignition is
switched on or the engine is running.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
In the cargo area
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, for example portable navigation
devices, etc., can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior
when unfolding. There is risk of injuries. make
sure that devices and cables are not in the air‐
bag's area of unfolding.◀
The socket is located on the right side in the
NOTE
cargo area.
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a USB interface/AUX-IN port
risk of property damage. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting The concept
aid terminals in the engine compartment.◀ Mobile devices with USB port can be connected
to the USB interface.
NOTE
A mobile audio device, e.g. a MP3 player, can
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
be connected using the AUX-IN port.
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
General information
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
The following devices can be connected:
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB inter‐
face.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for example
MP3 player.
▷ USB storage devices.
162
Common file systems are supported. FAT32 ▷ Due to the many different compression
and exFAT are the recommended formats. techniques, proper playback of the media
Information about compatible USB devices can stored on the USB storage device cannot be
be found at www.miniusa.com/bluetooth. guaranteed in all cases.
The following applications are possible: ▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
▷ Exporting and importing profiles, refer to
interface if the device supports this.
page 42.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
data, do not charge a USB storage device
▷ Adding music files to the music collection via the onboard socket, when it is con‐
and saving the music collection. nected to the USB interface.
▷ Playing video films via USB video. ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
▷ Loading of software updates. should be used, settings may be required
on the USB storage device, refer to the de‐
Overview vice owner's manual.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lights.
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
cated in the center armrest.
Connecting an external device

Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the device owner's
manual.
163
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and op‐ ▷ Storage compartment in front of the cup
holders.
tions ▷ Storage compartments in the cargo area.
This chapter describes all standard, country- ▷ Storage tray in the center console.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Glove compartment
the applicable laws and regulations must be Safety information
observed. WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
Safety information the glove compartment can be thrown into the
WARNING vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
Loose objects or devices with a cable maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones, close the glove compartment immediately after
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while using it.◀
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices Opening
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Overview Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches
The following storage compartments are avail‐
on.
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side. Closing
▷ Compartments in the doors. Fold up the cover.
▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest.
164
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Lock Opening
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the tail‐
gate, e.g.
This prevents access to the glove compartment
and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Press button, arrow 1, and open center armrest

Driver's seat upward, arrow 2.
There is a storage compartment under the driv‐

er's seat. Adjusting the height
Compartments in the
doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There
is a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable Press button, arrow 1, and swing center arm‐
objects in the vehicle's interior.◀ rest upward or downward into the desired
height, arrow 2.
Center armrest
Cup holders
General information
The center armrest contains a storage compart‐ Safety information
ment. WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. Use light-weight, unbreakable,
and sealable containers. Do not transport hot
beverages. Do not force objects into the cup
holder.◀
165
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Front
In the center console.
Rear
In front of the rear seats.
166
Cargo area CONTROLS
Cargo area
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
tions be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
This chapter describes all standard, country- event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
specific and optional features offered with the sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
series. It also describes features that are not and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due secure objects and cargo properly.◀
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ NOTE
tems. When using these functions and systems, Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
the applicable laws and regulations must be age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
observed. sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
Steps for Determining Correct Load

Loading Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
Safety information weight of occupants and cargo should
WARNING never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sudden 2. Determine the combined weight of the
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐ driver and passengers that will be riding in
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing your vehicle.
lane stability, lengthening the braking distances 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and changing the steering response. There is a and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
risk of an accident. Pay attention to the permit‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available
ted load capacity of the tires and never exceed amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
the permitted gross weight.◀ pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
WARNING
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
Loose objects or devices with a cable amount of available cargo and luggage
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones, load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while 150) = 650 lbs.)
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
That weight may not safely exceed the
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
vehicle's interior.◀
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
167
CONTROLS Cargo area
how this reduces the available cargo and Loading aid

luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Concept
Load
For easier loading, the vehicle is equipped with
loading aid. When the loading aid is opened,
objects can be stowed that would not other‐
wise fit through the tailgate opening.
Safety information
WARNING
When opening and closing the loading
aid, body parts can be jammed, for example by
the mechanism. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the loading
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
aid is clear during operation.◀
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the WARNING
less cargo that can be transported. With a lifted loading aid, vehicle parts can
protrude and limit the view. There is a danger
Stowing and securing cargo of accidents and property damage. Before driv‐
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the ing off, make sure that the loading aid is com‐
cargo. pletely lowered and the tailgate is closed.◀
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of Opening the loading aid
the rear passenger seat backrests. 1. Unlock the convertible top using the han‐
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not dles, arrows 1.
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet
straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
2. Lift convertible top, arrow 2.
straps.
3. Fold back the handles and place on the
brackets, arrows 3.
Closing the loading aid

1. Remove handles from the brackets.
2. Push convertible top down and hold.
168
Cargo area CONTROLS
3. Push the handles outward to lock the con‐ Enlarging the cargo
vertible top.
4. Check that the convertible top is locked.
area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
Lashing eyes in the cargo
▷ The rear seat backrests in the rear can be
area folded down.
▷ The cargo area partition can be swung up‐
ward when the convertible top is closed.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 50 to 50.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the cargo area.
To secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes

Safety information
in the cargo area.
WARNING
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing Danger of jamming with folding down the
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area. property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
Storage space under
WARNING
cargo floor panel
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior,
e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the backrest engages into the locking after
folding it back.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
Located under the cargo floor panel on the adjustment or improper installation of the child
right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
tool kit. Make sure that the child restraint system fits
Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel up‐
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
ward to remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
169
CONTROLS Cargo area
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐ Cargo area partition
move them.◀ 1. Fold the convertible top upward as descri‐
bed under Loading aid, refer to page 168.
WARNING
2. Swing the cargo area partition upward and
Body parts can be jammed when moving
pull backward out of the lower supports, ar‐
rows 1.
when moving the head restraint.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest

from the cargo area
1. Before the backrest is folded down, remove
the respective safety belt from the rear belt
guide, refer to page 59.
2. Pull the lever.
3. Insert the cargo area partition into the up‐

per supports, arrows 2, until it engages and
place down horizontally.
The loading aid cannot be locked if the
cargo area partition is not fully inserted into
the upper supports.
4. Fold the convertible top downward as de‐
scribed under Loading aid, refer to
page 168, and lock it.
3. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
Return the cargo area partition into the lower
position so that the convertible top can be
Fold back the backrest
used.
1. Fold up the backrest and press it into the
latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not
pinched.
2. Close the belt guide loop of the rear belt
guide, refer to page 59.
170
Cargo area CONTROLS
171
DRIVE ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and op‐ ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
tions Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
This chapter describes all standard, country- stances.
series. It also describes features that are not From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
to the selected options or country versions. This increased.
tems. When using these functions and systems, Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
observed.
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Breaking-in period Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together Brake system
smoothly.
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Drive moderately during this break-in period.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control,
refer to page 81. Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
Safety information level only after a distance driven of approx.
WARNING 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react with a
Following part replacement
delay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐ The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
servatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ served if any of the components above-men‐
serve the break-in procedures of the respective tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
parts and components.◀ vehicle's operating life.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
174
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
General driving notes erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's interior

use only mobile phones with direct connections
to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mu‐
Closing the tailgate
tual interference and deflect the radiation from
WARNING the vehicle's interior.◀
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other traf‐ Hydroplaning
fic participants or damage the vehicle in the
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
form between the tires and road surface.
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
risk of damage to property. Do not drive with ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
the tailgate open.◀ loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be steer and brake the vehicle.
avoided:
▷ If the convertible top is closed, close all Driving through water
windows and the sliding sun roof. NOTE
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. When driving too quickly through too
▷ Drive moderately. deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
Hot exhaust system transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
WARNING
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
During driving operation, high tempera‐ the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body, ter.◀
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If com‐
bustible materials, such as leaves or grass, When driving through water, observe the fol‐
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust lowing:
gas system, these materials can ignite. There is ▷ Drive through calm water only.
a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
not remove the heat shields installed and never
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust
system.◀ Braking safely
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
Mobile communication devices in the feature.
vehicle Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
WARNING
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
can influence one another. There is radiation
fort.
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
175
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from sistance, are restricted or not available at all.
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in
active mode. idle state or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the

Objects in the area around the pedals
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
WARNING wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit brake efficiency.
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. You can increase the engine's braking effect by
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐ needed.
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can Brake disc corrosion
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ lowing circumstances:
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐ ▷ Low mileage.
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀ ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
Driving in wet conditions ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, ▷ Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
press brake pedal ever so gently every few agents.
miles. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
Ensure that this action does not endanger other a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
traffic. sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
The heat generated when braking helps to dry
the brake discs and pads and protect them Condensation water under the parked
from corrosion. vehicle
In this way braking efficiency will be available When using the automatic climate control, con‐
when you need it. densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Hills
Ground clearance
WARNING
NOTE
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out If ground clearance is insufficient, there
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk might be contact with the front or rear spoiler,
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress e.g., when driving over curbs or entering into
on the brake system.◀ underground vehicle parking garages. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that there is
WARNING sufficient ground clearance available.◀
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions, e.g., engine brak‐
ing effect, braking force boost and steering as‐
176
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Rear luggage rack ▷ Do not exceed the approved axle load and
the approved gross vehicle weight.
General information ▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
Installation only possible with rear luggage rack
tly.
preparation.
Rear racks are available as special accessories. Power consumption
Before starting to drive, check the function of
Securing
the rear luggage rack lights.
COOPER The rear luggage rack lights must not consume
more than:
▷ Turn signals: 42 watts per side.
▷ Rear lights: 50 watts per side.
▷ Brake lights: 84 watts in total.
▷ Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total.
▷ Backup light: 42 watts in total.
Driving on racetracks
COOPER S
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
The anchorage points, arrow 1, and the socket,

arrow 2, are located below the covers in the
bumper.
Remove the covers before installing the rear
luggage rack.
Loading
Because rear luggage racks raise the vehicle's
center of gravity when loaded, they have a ma‐
jor effect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
177
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and op‐ Closing the windows
tions Open windows increase air resistance and
therefore lead to greater fuel consumption.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Tires
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ General information
tems. When using these functions and systems, Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
the applicable laws and regulations must be ways, for example, tire size may influence fuel
observed. consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure

General information regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
The vehicle features advanced technology for
pressure at least twice a month and before
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
starting on a long trip.
sions.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ferent factors.
tire wear.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can influ‐
ence fuel consumption and environmental im‐
pact.
Drive away without de‐
lay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
Remove unnecessary the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
cargo right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
reach its operating temperature.
Remove attached parts

Look well ahead when
following use
driving
Remove rear luggage racks which are no longer
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
required following use.
consumption.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
178
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
cle driving ahead of you. of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
Avoid high engine speeds road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Starting
Switch off any functions
with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When ac‐
celerating, shift up before reaching high engine that are not currently
speeds. needed
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
the highest applicable gear and drive with low
window defroster require a lot of energy and
engine speed and at a constant speed.
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift in‐ stop-and-go traffic.
dicator, refer to page 90.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take your foot Have maintenance car‐
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a ried out
halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐ Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
erator and let the vehicle roll. optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
formed by a MINI service center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer
to page 218.
Switch off the engine
during longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., GREEN Mode
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion. Concept
GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves
Auto Start/Stop function on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐ gine control and comfort features, for instance
tomatically switches off the engine during a the climate control output, are adjusted.
stop. For Steptronic transmission:
If the engine is switched off and then restarted Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ matically decoupled from the transmission in
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
179
duce fuel consumption. The D selector lever Activating/deactivating the functions

position remains engaged. The following functions can be activated/deac‐
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are tivated:
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐ ▷ "GREEN speed warning"
sumption driving style.
▷ "Coasting"
The achieved extended range is displayed in
▷ "GREEN climate control"
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information used.
The system includes the following MINIMALISM
functions and MINIMALISM displays:
GREEN Limit
▷ Activate the GREEN Limit:
▷ GREEN bonus range, refer to page 181.
"GREEN speed warning":
▷ GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 181. A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the
set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
▷ GREEN climate control, refer to page 180.
▷ Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit:
▷ MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 183.
"Tip at:"
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 182. Select the desired speed.
Activating GREEN Mode GREEN climate control

Turn MINI Driving Modes switch Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
to the right until GREEN Mode is By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
displayed in the instrument clus‐ ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling
ter. of the vehicle's interior fuel consumption can
be economized.
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
Configuring GREEN Additionally heat output to seats and exterior
mirror is reduced.
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activating GREEN Mode. Coasting
2. "Configure GREEN" Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
3. Select the desired setting. ing the engine and coasting, refer to page 182,
with the engine idling.
Via the onboard monitor: This function is only available in GREEN Mode.
1. "Settings" Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐
2. "GREEN Mode" fect of the engine when traveling downhill.
Or
GREEN potential savings
1. "Settings" Shows potential savings with the current set‐
2. "Driving mode" tings in percentages.
3. "Configure GREEN"
Select the desired setting.
180
Display in the instrument cluster GREEN tip, driving instruction
GREEN bonus range

An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the bo‐
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
The GREEN tip indicates that the driving style
time the vehicle is refueled.
can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient, for
▷ Green display: efficient driving style. example by backing off the accelerator.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, for in‐
stance by backing off the accelerator pedal. Activating the driving style indicator
and GREEN tips
Driving style The driving style indicator and GREEN tips are
A bar display in the instrument shown in the instrument cluster when the
cluster indicates your current GREEN Mode display is activated.
driving efficiency. Via the onboard monitor:
Mark in the left area, arrow 1: 1. "Settings"
display for energy recovered by
coasting or when braking. 2. "Instrument cluster"
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when 3. "GREEN Info"

accelerating.
GREEN tip, symbols
The efficiency of your driving style is shown by
the position of the mark: An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
▷ Mark inside the green range: efficient driv‐
Symbol Measure
ing style.
▷ Mark outside the green range: adjust driv‐ For efficient driving back off the ac‐
ing style, for example by backing off the ac‐ celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
celerator. low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected GREEN

speed.
Steptronic transmission:
Switch from M/S to D or avoid manual
shift interventions.
181
Symbol Measure This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

Manual transmission: As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator
pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
Follow the shift instructions.
again.
Manual transmission:
General information
Engage neutral for an engine stop.
Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving
mode.
Indications on the Control Display Coasting is automatically activated when the
GREEN driving mode is called via the MINI Driv‐
Displaying MINIMALISM info ing Modes switch, refer to page 129.
The current efficiency of the functions in GREEN
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
Mode can be displayed on the Control Display.
the function often and supports the fuel-con‐
Via the onboard monitor: serving effect of coasting.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "MINIMALISM"
In GREEN mode, this function is available in a
3. "MINIMALISM info" speed range from approximately
Information is shown on the following func‐ 30 mph/50 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h if the
tions: following conditions are met:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
▷ Energy recovery. operated.
▷ Climate control output. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Coasting.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
Displaying GREEN tips temperature.
"GREEN tips"
Operation via shift paddles
Driving instruction and an additional symbol
are displayed. Concept
Settings are stored for the profile currently Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
used. coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
paddles.
Coasting
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
Concept paddles
The function helps to conserve fuel. 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
To do this, under certain conditions the engine shift paddle.
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ 2. Actuate the right shift paddle again to enter
sion when selector lever position D is set. The coasting mode.
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
182
Display ▷ The vehicle electrical system is drawing ex‐

cessive current.
Display in the instrument cluster
The bar display below the tach‐
MINIMALISM analyzer
ometer is filled in green and the
mark appears at the zero point.
Concept
The tachometer approximately The function helps develop an especially effi‐
indicates idle speed. cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
Indications on the Control Display The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
The coasting driving condition is displayed in
MINIMALISM Info while driving. Using this indication, the individual driving style
can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
The distance traveled in the coasting driving
condition is indicated by a counter. The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by an
efficient driving style. This gain in range is dis‐
played as a bonus range in the instrument clus‐
ter and on the Control Display.
This function is available in GREEN Mode.
Calling up MINIMALISM Analyser

Color code green, arrow 1: distance traveled in Via MINI Driving Modes switch
the coasting driving condition. Symbol, arrow 2:
coasting driving condition. 1. Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "MINIMALISM"
Displaying MINIMALISM info 3. Select the symbol.
1. "Vehicle info"
Display on the Control Display
2. "MINIMALISM"
3. "MINIMALISM info"
System limits
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions applies:
▷ DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
▷ Cruise control is activated.
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer con‐
▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades. sists of a fish in a water glass riding along on
▷ The battery charge state is temporarily too the roof of a MINI and a table of values.
low.
183
The fish and the movements of the water in the

glass, arrow 1, symbolize the efficiency of the
driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the less the
water sloshes around in the glass and the bet‐
ter is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inef‐
ficient, the water oscillates, the mood of the
fish is sullied and a reduced number of asterisks
is displayed.
The table of values, arrow 2, contains stars and
evaluates the driving style in different catego‐
ries. The more efficient the driving style, the
more stars are displayed in the table.
The bonus range, arrow 3, achieved by a driv‐
ing style that minimizes fuel consumption is
displayed below the table of values. The more
efficient the driving style, the faster the bonus
range increases.
To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN
tips are displayed while driving.
Tips about the energy saving driving style, Con‐
serving fuel, refer to page 178.
184
185
MOVE ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and op‐ Fuel cap
tions
Opening
This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge
specific and optional features offered with the and open it.
observed.
General information
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 190, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of property damage.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
Refuel promptly.◀
to the fuel filler flap.
188
Refueling MOBILITY
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have the fuel filler flap checked by a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
Observe the following

when refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact
with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environ‐
ment. There is a risk of property damage. Avoid
overfilling.◀
189
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and op‐ Safety information
tions NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
This chapter describes all standard, country- refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
specific and optional features offered with the catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
series. It also describes features that are not There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
to the selected options or country versions. This engines:
tems. When using these functions and systems, ▷ Leaded gasoline.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
observed. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
Fuel recommendation repair shop.◀
NOTE
General information
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
Depending on the region, many gas stations
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
winter helps make a cold start easier, for exam‐
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
ple.
to M100.◀
Gasoline NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
General information
mum quality can compromise engine function
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ not comply with the minimum quality.◀
taining metal must not be used.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐ when starting at high outside temperatures.
ing. This has no effect on the engine life.
Ethanol should meet the following quality
CAUTION
standards:
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
US: ASTM 4806–xx
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx ally, problems relating to drivability, starting
xx: comply with the current standard in each and stalling, especially under certain environ‐
case. mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐
perature and high altitude, may occur.
190
Fuel MOBILITY
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐

ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Recommended fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 91.
John Cooper Works:
Minimum fuel grade

John Cooper Works:
191
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and op‐ ature. The tire inflation pressure specifications
relate to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera‐
tions ture.
This chapter describes all standard, country- The displays of inflation devices may under-
specific and optional features offered with the read by up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi.
series. It also describes features that are not Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due tion pressure.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Moni‐
tor.
observed. For Tire Pressure Monitor: perform a reset of
the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting tire
pressure to a new value.
Tire inflation pressure ▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ Checking the inflation pressure of the
sure influence the following: emergency wheel
▷ The service life of the tires. Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly,
▷ Road safety.
and correct it as needed.
▷ Driving comfort.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
Safety information The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
WARNING page 193, contains all tire inflation pressure
A tire with low or missing tire inflation specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
pressure impacts handling, such as steering ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
and braking response. There is a risk of an acci‐ sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a month type.
and before a long trip.◀ To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
Checking the tire inflation pressure ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
been parked for at least 2 hours. 160 km/h
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire inflation For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
pressure increases along with the tire's temper‐ optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
192
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer Tire inflation pressure values up to
to page 193, and adjust as necessary. 100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER
Tire size Pressure specifications in

bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
These pressure values can also be found on the 175/60 R 16 86 H 2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door M+S XL RSC
pillar. 175/65 R 15 84 H
M+S A/S Std
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
175/65 R 15 84 H
M+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H
Std
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87
V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
Emergency wheel Speed up to a max. of

T 115/70 R 15 90 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
193
COOPER S JOHN COOPER WORKS
Tire size Pressure specifications in Tire size Pressure specifications in

bar/PSI bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires
195/55 R 16 87 H 2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35 185/50 R 17 86 H 2.9 / 42 2.7 / 39

M+S RSC M+S XL RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M 205/45 R 17 88 W
+S A/S RSC XL RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W 205/45 R 17 88 V
RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H 2.9 / 42 2.7 / 39 205/45 R 17 88 V

M+S XL RSC M+S XL RSC
185/50 R 17 86 H 205/40 R 18 86 W
M+S XL RSC XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
205/45 R 17 88 V M
above 100 mph/160 km/h
+S XL RSC WARNING
205/45 R 17 88 W In order to drive at maximum speeds in
XL RSC excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
205/40 R 18 86 W and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
XL RSC speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for op‐

timum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 195, and adjust as necessary.
194
Tire inflation pressure values over COOPER S

100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
COOPER
Specifications in
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI with cold
bar/PSI
tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires 195/55 R 16 87 H 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
175/65 R 15 84 H 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38 +S A/S RSC
M+S A/S Std
195/55 R 16 87 W
175/65 R 15 84 H RSC
M+S Std
175/60 R 16 86 H 3.1 / 45 2.9 / 42
175/65 R 15 84 H
M+S XL RSC
Std
185/50 R 17 86 H
175/60 R 16 86 H
M+S XL RSC
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
185/50 R 17 86 H
+S XL A/S RSC
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
195/55 R 16 87 H
+S XL RSC
M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
195/55 R 16 87
XL RSC
V M+S A/S RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
195/55 R 16 87 W
XL RSC
RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
Emergency wheel Speed up to a max. of

T 115/70 R 15 90 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
195
On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
WORKS GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Tire size Pressure specifications in Speed letter

bar/PSI
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
tires V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
185/50 R 17 86 H 3.2 / 46 3.0 / 44 Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

M+S XL RSC
Tire Identification Number
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3816
205/45 R 17 88 V xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

M+S XL A/S RSC xxx: tire size and tire design
205/45 R 17 88 V 3816: tire age
M+S XL RSC Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
205/40 R 18 86 W 3.4 / 49 3.2 / 46
XL RSC
Tire age
DOT … 3816: the tire was manufactured in the
38th week of 2016.
Tire identification marks
Recommendation
Tire size Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
205/45 R 17 84 V least every 6 years.
205: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
R: radial tire code
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
17: rim diameter in inches and maximum section width.
84: load rating, not for ZR tires E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
F: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires A
Maximum tire load DOT Quality Grades

Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible Treadwear
weight for which the tire is approved. Traction AA A B C
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐ Temperature A B C
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR –
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
on the certification label on the driver’s door
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be
these grades.
greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
196
Treadwear WARNING
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well in combination, can cause heat buildup and
on the government course as a tire graded 100. possible tire failure.◀
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and RSC – Run-flat tires
may depart significantly from the norm due to
Run-flat tires, refer to page 200, are labeled
variations in driving habits, service practices
with a circular symbol containing the letters
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
RSC marked on the sidewall.
mate.
M+S
Traction
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
weather performance than summer tires.
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under control‐
led conditions on specified government test
Tire tread
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance. Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
0.12 in/3 mm.
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐ There is an increased risk of hydroplaning if the
droplaning, or peak traction characteristics. tire tread depth is less than 0.12 inches/3 mm.
Temperature Winter tires

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the 0.16 inches/4 mm.
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires
heat when tested under controlled conditions are less suitable for winter operation.
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger ve‐
hicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
197
Minimum tread depth Safety information

WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is
suspected while driving, immediately reduce
speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm. WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
They are marked on the side of the tire with sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. There is a risk of an accident. Do not repair
damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀
Tire damage
Changing wheels and
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
tires
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Mounting
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
out by a dealer’s service center or another
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to Wheel and tire combination
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low- General information
profile tires. You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
functions:
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ the function of a variety of systems such as ABS
dency to pull to the left or right. or DSC.
Damage can, e.g., be caused by driving over To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
curbs, road damage, or similar things. sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
198
Safety information dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does

not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
Winter tires
cle, for instance due to contact with the body Winter tires are recommended for operating on
due to tolerances despite the same official size winter roads.
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manu‐ Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
facturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that better winter traction than summer tires, they
you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐ do not provide the same level of performance
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for as winter tires.
your vehicle type.◀
Maximum speed of winter tires
Recommended tire brands If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The label is available from a
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
cle recommends certain tire brands. These can own safety you should replace them only with
be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
New tires qualified service center or repair shop.
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; Rotating wheels between axles
they achieve their full traction potential after a Different wear patterns can occur on the front
break-in time. and rear axles depending on individual driving
Drive conservatively for the first conditions. The tires can be rotated between
200 miles/300 km. the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐
mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
Retreaded tires ter or another qualified service center or repair
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
ommend the use of retreaded tires. correct if needed.
WARNING
Storage
Retreaded tires can have different tire Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐ place.
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
199
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ Repairing a flat tire
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
Run-flat tires from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
Concept
Runflat tires permit continued driving under re‐ ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐ setting the parking brake.
plete loss of tire inflation pressure. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
General information side the immediate area in a safe place,
The wheels are composed of tires that are self- such as behind a guardrail.
supporting to a limited degree. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐ portable hazard warning light at a sufficient
main drivable to a restricted degree in the distance.
event of a tire inflation pressure loss. ▷ Change wheels only on a flat, solid and slip-
Follow the instructions for continued driving resistant surface. On soft or slippery
with a flat tire. ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc.,
the vehicle or the vehicle jack may slip
away sideways.
Label
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine, or else
there is a danger to life.
RSC label on the tire sidewall.

Mobility System
The concept
Changing run-flat tires
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer into the tires, which seals the damage from the
additional questions at any time. inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
200
General information Compressor

▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies 1 Sealant container unlocking
that have penetrated the tire. 2 Holder for sealant container
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant 3 Inflation pressure dial
container and apply it to the steering 4 Reduce inflation pressure
wheel.
5 On/off switch
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
6 Compressor
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked and replaced at the 7 Connector/cable for socket
next opportunity. 8 Connection hose
Overview
Filling the tire with sealant
Storage
Safety information
The Mobility System is located under the cargo
floor panel. DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
Sealant container tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of the
vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐
haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1. tended operation. There is a risk of property
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. damage. Do not run the compressor for more
Observe use-by date on the sealant container. than 10 min.◀
201
Filling 4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐

1. Shake the sealant container. tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover

of the sealant container. Do not kink the 5. With the compressor switched off, insert
hose. the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder

on the compressor housing, ensuring that it 6. With the ignition turned on or the engine
engages audibly. running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to

fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor
at this point.
202
Checking and adjusting the tire 4. Insert the connector into the power socket
inflation pressure inside the vehicle.
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of
at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant

container 5. With the ignition turned on or the engine
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ running, switch on the compressor.
tainer from the wheel. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar
2. Press the red release button. cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
3. Remove the sealant container from the
center or repair shop.
compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo
sure is reached.
area.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not pressor from the tire valve.
reached 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
inside the vehicle. 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire. Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 1. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
2. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed
in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
203
Adjustment Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to

1. Stop at a suitable location. page 113.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle. Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least snow chains on tires that are designated by
2.0 bar. their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.◀
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, switch Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
on the compressor. with the tires of the following size:
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ ▷ 175/65 R 15.
ton on the compressor. ▷ 175/60 R 16.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ ▷ 185/50 R 17.
pressor from the tire valve.
John Cooper Works:
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket
185/50 R 17.
inside the vehicle.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
tions.
Continuing the trip Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
page 117.
in incorrect readings.
204
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after WARNING

mounting snow chains, as doing so may result The vehicle jack is only provided for
in incorrect readings. short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
Dynamic Traction Control, if needed. served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
Maximum speed with snow chains of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
when using snow chains. start the engine.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
Changing wheels/tires the vehicle and for the jacking points on the ve‐
hicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
General information any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
When using runflat tires or tire sealants, a tire jack.◀
does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat WARNING
tire. If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
available as accessories from a dealer’s service hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
center or another qualified service center or re‐ slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
pair shop. of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐
Safety information serted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
WARNING
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac‐ WARNING
turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
not designed for frequent use; for example, erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
changing from summer to winter tires.. Using damage to property. While the vehicle is raised,
the jack frequently may cause it to become do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel re‐
and risk of damage to property. Only use the moved by a dealer’s service center or another
jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in qualified service center or repair shop.◀
the event of a breakdown.◀
WARNING Securing the vehicle against rolling

On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow, ice,
General information
tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There
is a risk of injury. If possible, change the tire/ The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
wheel on a flat, solid and slip-resistant sur‐ tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
face.◀ when changing a wheel.
205
On a level surface immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐

hind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
remove the tool and the emergency wheel
from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in reach its carrying capacity because of the
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to restricted height.
the wheel to be changed. ▷ Also secure the vehicle against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
On a slight downhill gradient
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
If you need to change a wheel on a slight

downhill gradient, place chocks and other suit‐ The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
able objects, for example a rock, under the cated at the marked positions.
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
the rolling direction.
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Preparing the vehicle
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
from passing traffic and on solid and non-
Comply with the described hand position and
slip ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as the traffic flow permits, have all
vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the
206
do not change this position while using the ve‐ 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
hicle jack.◀ tended vertically.
1. Hold the jack with one hand, arrow 1, and

grasp the crank or lever with your other
hand, arrow 2.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands

vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire

surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the crank
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
or lever clockwise.
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the

wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
as the vehicle jack is under load and con‐ hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
tinue turning the crank or lever with one companying lug bolts may have to be used
hand. as well.
3. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
207
4. Turn the crank on the vehicle jack counter‐ the storage compartment for the onboard vehi‐
clockwise to retract the jack and lower the cle tool kit.
vehicle.
1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench
5. Remove the vehicle jack. from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ 2. Remove the retaining plate.
portunity and correct as needed. 3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. and hold in place with one hand.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
emergency wheel
4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer‐
General information gency wheel well using the hexagon at‐
tached to retaining plate.
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used in place of the wheel with the de‐
fective tire. The emergency wheel is only in‐
tended for temporary use until the defective
tire/wheel is replaced.
Removing the emergency wheel

The emergency wheel is housed in a well on
the underbody of the vehicle. The screw con‐
nection of the emergency wheel is in the cargo
area underneath the floor mat, on the floor of 5. Lower the emergency wheel with the wheel
wrench.
6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench
7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel un‐
der the vehicle toward the rear.
208
8. Remove the spacer and emergency wheel

from the well.
9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.
Replacing the tires

1. Have the damaged tire replaced.
2. Replace the emergency wheel with the new
wheel.
Installing the emergency wheel

Have the emergency wheel installed back into
the vehicle by a dealer’s service center or an‐
Safety information
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular di‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may occur at
higher speeds, e.g., reduced lane stability when
braking, longer braking distance and changed
self-steering properties in the limit area. There
is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and
do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.◀
209
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Washer fluid reservoir 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir
Hood personal and property damage. The manufac‐

turer of your vehicle recommends that, in the
effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine
Safety information
compartment be performed by a dealer’s serv‐
WARNING ice center or another qualified service center or
Improperly executed work in the engine repair shop.◀
compartment can damage vehicle components
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of
210
Engine compartment MOBILITY
WARNING Hood is unlocked.

The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components in
the engine compartment can also move with
the vehicle switched off, e.g., the radiator fan.
There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the
area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing
and hair away from moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
again, arrow 2.
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these Hood can be opened.
areas.◀
Indicator/warning lights
WARNING When the hood is opened, a Check Control
An incorrectly locked hood can open message is displayed.
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐ Closing the hood
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of Let the hood fall from approx. 16 inches/40 cm,
property damage. Make sure that the wipers arrow.
with the wiper blades mounted are folded The hood must engage on both sides.
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
NOTE
When the hood is closed, it must engage
on both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of property damage. Open
the hood again and then close it energetically.
Avoid pressing again.◀
Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
211
MOBILITY Engine oil
Engine oil
Vehicle features and op‐ Electronic oil measure‐
tions ment
Status display
The concept
to the selected options or country versions. This The engine oil level is monitored electronically
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ while driving and shown on the Control Display.
tems. When using these functions and systems, If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
the applicable laws and regulations must be level, a check control message is displayed.
observed.
A current measured value is available after ap‐
General information prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
displayed.
the driving style and driving conditions.
With frequent short-distance trips, perform a
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
detailed measurement.
after refueling.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the Displaying the engine oil level
following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
1. "Vehicle info"
▷ Break-in of the engine.
2. "Vehicle status"
▷ Idling of the engine.
3. "Engine oil level"
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Engine oil level display messages
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
Different messages appear on the display de‐
measurement.
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ to these messages.
uring principles:
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
▷ Status display. 125 miles/200 km, add engine oil, refer to
▷ Detailed measurement. page 213.
A red indicator light indicates that the
engine oil pressure is too low.
212
Engine oil MOBILITY
NOTE 3. "Measure engine oil level"

An engine oil level that is too low causes 4. "Start measurement"
engine damage. There is a risk of property The engine oil level is checked and displayed
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀ via a scale.
Take care not to add too much engine oil. Time: approx. 1 minute.
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
Adding engine oil
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have oil General information
level corrected by a dealer’s service center or Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
another qualified service center or repair played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
shop.◀ to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Detailed measurement Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
The concept
In the detailed measurement the engine oil Safety information
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary, WARNING
and displayed via a scale. Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
level, a check control message is displayed. ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ Observe the instructions on the containers.
creased somewhat. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
Functional requirements erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral NOTE
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not An engine oil level that is too low causes
depressed. engine damage. There is a risk of property
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐ damage.
lector lever position N or P and accelerator Add engine oil within the next
pedal not depressed. 125 miles/200 km.◀
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature. NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
Performing a detailed measurement gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
Via the onboard monitor: property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have oil
1. "Vehicle info" level corrected by a dealer’s service center or
2. "Vehicle status" another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
213
MOBILITY Engine oil
Overview Suitable engine oil types

The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
partment, refer to page 210. ing standards:
Gasoline engine
Opening the oil filler neck
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 210.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise, arrow.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
3. Add engine oil. Gasoline engine
After refilling, perform a detailed measure‐
BMW Longlife-01.
ment, refer to page 213.
API SL or superior oil rating.
Engine oil types to add Viscosity grades

Gasoline engine:
General information
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
engine.
0W-20. Alternatively, also engine oils with vis‐
cosity grades SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-20, SAE
Safety information
5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 can be used.
NOTE More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
Oil additives can damage the engine. ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
oil additives.◀ other qualified service center or repair shop.
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐ Engine oil change
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine NOTE
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐ Engine oil that is not changed in timely
rect oil rating.◀ fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
214
Engine oil MOBILITY
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
215
MOBILITY Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and op‐ Coolant level
tions
Overview
This chapter describes all standard, country- The coolant reservoir is in the engine compart‐
specific and optional features offered with the ment, refer to page 210.
Open the hood, refer to page 210.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Checking
tems. When using these functions and systems, There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
the applicable laws and regulations must be coolant reservoir.
observed.
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
General information sure to dissipate, then open it.
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
WARNING
the minimum and maximum marks in the
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐ filler neck.
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
216
Coolant MOBILITY
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up

to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Close cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
217
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and op‐ General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
tions page 89, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
This chapter describes all standard, country- play.
series. It also describes features that are not Service data in the remote control
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Information on the required maintenance is
to the selected options or country versions. This continuously stored in the remote control. The
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ dealer’s service center can read this data out
tems. When using these functions and systems, and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
the applicable laws and regulations must be for the vehicle.
observed.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required Storage periods
maintenance measures, and thereby provides Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
erational reliability of the vehicle. count.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
according to the country-specific version. Re‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
rately. Further information is available from a necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
dealer’s service center or another qualified crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty In‐

Condition Based Service formation Booklet for
CBS US models and Warranty
Concept and Service Guide Book‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ let for Canadian models
count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
uses these to calculate the need for mainte‐ mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
nance. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
The system makes it possible to adapt the for additional information on service require‐
amount of maintenance corresponding to your ments.
user profile. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
218
Maintenance MOBILITY
dealer’s service center or another qualified Emissions

service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained. Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
Socket for OBD Onboard ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
Diagnosis
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Safety information
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
NOTE tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an ous engine misfiring within a brief period
intricate component intended to be used in can seriously damage emission control
conjunction with specialized equipment to components, in particular the catalytic con‐
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system. verter.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
219
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and op‐ erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
tions the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTE
series. It also describes features that are not Folded-away wipers can be jammed
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
to the selected options or country versions. This property damage. Make sure that the wipers
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ with the wiper blades mounted are folded
tems. When using these functions and systems, down onto the windshield before opening the
the applicable laws and regulations must be hood.◀
observed.
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
Onboard vehicle tool kit wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the on‐

board vehicle tool kit is located on the right
side under the cargo area floor or in a bag on
4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the holder
the right side of the cargo area.
on the wiper arm, arrow 1.
After use, secure the bag for the onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
Wiper blade replacement

Safety information
NOTE
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder of
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
the wiper arm, arrow 2.
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
220
Replacing components MOBILITY
6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re‐ WARNING

verse order. Work on switched-on lighting systems
7. Fold down the wiper arm. can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury
or risk of property damage. When working on
the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
Light/bulb replacement question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
General information NOTE
Lights and bulbs Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.

There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
to vehicle safety.
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends its base.◀
that you have appropriate work performed by a
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here. WARNING
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s Too intensive brightness can irritate or
service center or another qualified service cen‐ damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
ter or repair shop. injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
Observe the safety information, refer to
covers.◀
page 221.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Headlight glass

Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐ Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source. ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐ driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
Class 1 light-emitting diodes. light glass does not need to be changed.
Observe the safety information, refer to If despite driving with the lights switched on,
page 221. increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
Safety information recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
Lights and bulbs ter or repair shop.
WARNING
Headlight setting
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
cooled off.◀
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
pair shop.
221
Front halogen lights, bulb replacement Bulbs: H4
1. Open the hood, refer to page 211.

Overview
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow, and
Halogen headlights remove.
1 Low beams/high beams 3. Pull off the connector.

2 Turn signal 4. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.
Bug light
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight hous‐

ing.
1 Parking lights 6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
2 Daytime running lights
3 Fog lights Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights and
Low beams/high beams bulbs, refer to page 221.
Follow the general instructions on lights and Bulbs: PW24W
bulbs, refer to page 221.
222
With white turn signal lights: PWY24W Parking lights/fog lights/daytime

running lights
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and
remove.
Bulbs:
▷ Parking lights for halogen headlights: W5W
Parking lights for LED headlights:
W5W NBV.
▷ Daytime running light: PSX24W.
▷ Fog light: H8.
Replacing the bulbs

3. Unscrew the inner lid counterclockwise,
and remove it.
remove.
4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if

3. Pull off the connector.
needed, loosen it with small tilting move‐
ments if possible. 4. Remove the bulb holder.
▷ Parking lights: turn the bulb holder, ar‐
row 1, counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Daytime running lights: squeeze the
upper and lower locks of the bulb
holder, arrow 2, and remove the bulb
holder.
For better accessibility, remove the bulb
of the fog light as needed.
5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.

6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
223
▷ Fog lights: turn the bulb holder, ar‐ Overview

row 3, counterclockwise and remove.
Position of the headlights

6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in 1 Daytime running lights
the reverse order. 2 Low beams/high beams
The daytime running lights bulb holder en‐ 3 Turn signal
gages audibly, first below, then above.
LED bug light
LED front lights, bulb replacement
General information
The following lights feature LED technology:
▷ Daytime running lights
▷ High beams
▷ Low beams
▷ Parking lights
▷ Fog lights
1 Parking lights
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐ 2 Fog lights
ter or repair shop.
Turn signal
Bulbs: PW24W
224
With white turn signal lights: PWY24W Tail lights, bulb replacement
Overview
remove. Vehicles with a rear fog lamp
3. Unscrew the inner lid counterclockwise, 1 Side tail lamps

and remove it.
2 Rear fog lamp
3 License plate lamp
4 Center brake lamp
Vehicle with two rear fog lights
4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if

needed, loosen it with small tilting move‐
ments if possible.
1 Side tail lamps

2 Rear fog lights
3 License plate lamp
4 Center brake lamp

6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
225
Side tail lamps Bulbs: P21W
1. Opening tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
1 Brake lights/tail lamps

2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lights 3. Through the opening, loosen the plug con‐
nector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.
Side LED tail lights Press the latches together, arrows 1, and
remove the bulb holder.
1 Tail lamps
2 Turn signal 4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
3 Brake light 5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
4 Reversing lights
▷ Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights.
▷ Arrow 2: turn signal.
Side tail lights
226
▷ Arrow 3: reversing light. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and

remove.
The wire is long enough to guide the socket
down and through between any heat shield
that may be installed and the bumper.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the

new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
4. Replace nonworking bulb.
Central brake lamp and license plate
5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse
lamp
order of removal.
bulbs, refer to page 221. Vehicle with two rear fog lights
The lights feature LED technology. In the case Follow the general instructions on lights and
of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service cen‐ bulbs, refer to page 221.
ter or another qualified service center or repair
Bulbs: W16W
shop.
Left rear fog lamp:
Vehicles with a rear fog lamp 1. On vehicles with heat shield:
Follow the general instructions on lights and Loosen 3 screws, arrow.
Bulbs: W16W
1. On vehicles with heat shield:
Loosen 3 screws, arrow.
2. Push the heat shield forward and the

bumper back in order to be able to reach
the fog lamp.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove.
2. Push the heat shield forward and the
bumper back in order to be able to reach
the fog lamp.
227
The wire is long enough to guide the socket ▷ With white lens: WY5W.
down and through between any heat shield 1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn
that may be installed and the bumper. signal lights are on the left and right next to
the hinges of the hood.

5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse 2. Loosen nuts of the cover by hand and re‐
order of removal. move the cover.
Right fog lamp:

remove.
The wire is long enough to guide the socket
down and through between any heat shield
that may be installed and the bumper.

remove.

3. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement

4. Replace the bulb.
5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal. Insert the nuts of the
Bulbs: cover and press down.
▷ With orange lens: W5W.
228
Vehicle battery The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐

lowing cases:
Maintenance ▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
The battery is maintenance-free.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
month.
service life of the battery.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for
More information about the battery can be re‐
long periods of time in selector lever posi‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
tion D, R or N.
Replacing the vehicle battery Safety information

NOTE
General information Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer can work with high voltages and currents,
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
battery be registered on the vehicle by a deal‐ work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a
er’s service center or another qualified service risk of property damage. Only connect battery
center or repair shop to ensure that all comfort chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
features are fully available and that any Check aid terminals in the engine compartment.◀
Control messages of these comfort features are
no longer displayed. Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
Safety information
starting aid terminals, refer to page 232, in the
NOTE engine compartment with the engine off.
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle Power failure
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐ After a power loss, some equipment needs to
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐ dated, for example:
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐
▷ Time: update.
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center.◀ ▷ Date: update.
Disposing of old batteries

Charging the battery
Have old batteries disposed of by a
General information dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop or
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
take them to a collection point.
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life. Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
A red indicator lamp is displayed when that it does not tip over during transport.
the battery is discharged.
229
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Replacing a fuse
The fuses are located in the glove compartment
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box.
1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
3. Replace the fuse in question.
230
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and op‐ Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can be
tions viewed on the onboard monitor or a connec‐
This chapter describes all standard, country- tion to Roadside Assistance can be established
specific and optional features offered with the directly.
to the selected options or country versions. This Warning triangle
observed.
Hazard warning flash‐

ers
The warning triangle is located in the cargo

area.
First-aid kit
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
The button is located above the Control Dis‐ Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
play. ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Jump-starting
Roadside Assistance General information

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
Service availability started using the battery of another vehicle and
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐ fully insulated clamp handles.
tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
231
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
Preparation
NOTE The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐ Connecting the cables
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀ 1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
information can be found on the battery. battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
cle. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power of the cable to the positive terminal of the
consumers in both vehicles. battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle to be started.
Starting aid terminals 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
WARNING
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
If the jumper cables are connected in the or body ground of assisting vehicle.
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
during connection.◀
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and

let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
run for approx. 10 minutes.
partment acts as the battery's positive terminal.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
started in the usual way.
232
If the first starting attempt is not successful, Tow truck

wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged
battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing Your vehicle should be transported with a tow

truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Safety information NOTE
WARNING When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
Due to system limits, individual functions or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
Pushing the vehicle
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀ To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger
area, it can be pushed for a short distance. The
vehicle can only be pushed in selector lever po‐
Steptronic transmission with driven sition N.
front axle: transporting the vehicle
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐
General information ceed as follows:
The vehicle must not be towed if the front 1. Switch on the ignition.
wheels are touching the ground. 2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage selector lever position N.
Safety information
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able
NOTE to change the selector lever position.
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐ Manually unlock the transmission lock, refer to
ing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a page 81, if needed.
risk of property damage. Have vehicle trans‐
ported only with lifted front axle or on a load‐ Manual transmission
ing platform.◀
Observe before towing your vehicle
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
233
Towing NOTE
NOTE When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
If manual unlocking of the parking brake
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or
damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
towed. There is a risk of property damage. The
vehicle should only be transported on a loading
platform.◀ Towing other vehicles
Information the following instructions:
General information
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
signals, and wipers may be unavailable. ing on local regulations.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tilted, as the front wheels could turn. tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or
a warning triangle in the rear window.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
Safety information
needs to be applied when braking and
steering. WARNING
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ If the approved gross vehicle weight of
quired. the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sponse. sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing
vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of towed.◀
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of NOTE
30 miles/50 km. If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
Tow truck cur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
With driven front axle fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
234
Tow rope Safety information

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure NOTE
that the tow rope is taut.
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
the vehicle components when towing, always tow fitting. There is a risk of property damage.
use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐ Screw thread for tow fitting
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
cur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow fitting
General information
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in

the front and rear of the vehicle on the right
side with respect to the direction of travel.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ Steptronic transmission

ried in the vehicle. Do not tow-start the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
rear of the vehicle. the Steptronic transmission.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
refer to page 220, are together in the cargo corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
area. other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use of the tow fitting:
Manual transmission
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
page 231. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
roads only.
alytic converter, only tow-start while the engine
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for is cold.
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting. 1. Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 68.
235
3. Engage third gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the
pedal. After the engine starts, immediately
press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
236
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle features and op‐ Automatic vehicle washes
tions Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTE
specific and optional features offered with the Water can penetrate in the windshield
series. It also describes features that are not area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due risk of property damage. Avoid high-pressure
to the selected options or country versions. This washers.◀
tems. When using these functions and systems, NOTE
the applicable laws and regulations must be Improper use of automatic vehicle
observed. washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There
is a risk of damage to property. Follow the fol‐
lowing instructions:
Vehicle washes ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
General information avoid paint damage.
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
in the area below the windshield when the higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
hood is raised. the chassis.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ avoid damage to tires and rims.
age the vehicle.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
▷ Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod
Safety information antenna breaking off.
NOTE ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain

sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
tem.
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high. There ▷ Do not treat the convertible top with wax.
is a risk of property damage. Maintain sufficient Ensure that a cycle without wax or a special
distance and do not spray too long continu‐ cycle for convertibles is available to avoid
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the damage to the convertible top.◀
high-pressure washer.◀
Before driving into a vehicle wash
Distances and temperature In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
vehicle wash, take the following steps:
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
Manual transmission:
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm. 1. Drive into the vehicle wash.
237
MOBILITY Care
2. Shift to neutral. can be reduced. The heat generated when

3. Switch the engine off. braking helps to dry the brake discs and pads
and protect them from corrosion.
Steptronic transmission:
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
1. Drive into the vehicle wash. dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
2. Engage selector lever position N. smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper
3. Make sure that the parking brake is re‐ blade wear.
leased.
4. Switch the engine off.
Vehicle care
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and two Check-Control messages are
Vehicle care products
displayed.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in General information
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
MINI recommends using vehicle care and
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
signal is sounded when an attempt is made to
products are available from a dealer’s service
lock the vehicle.
pair shop.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
To start the engine with manual transmission: Safety information
1. Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. WARNING
2. Press on the clutch pedal. Cleansers can contain substances that are
3. Press the Start/Stop button. dangerous and harmful to your health. There is
a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior,
To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐
open the doors or windows. Only use products
sion:
intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
1. Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. structions on the container.◀
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button. Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
Headlights value retention. Environmental influences in
Do not rub the headlights dry and do not use areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
quency and extent of your vehicle care to these
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
influences.
water.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
scraper.
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
238
Care MOBILITY
Caring for the convertible top Cleaning the convertible top

To remove heavy soiling, especially for light col‐
General information ored convertible tops, use a special convertible
The appearance and life of the convertible top top cleaner.
depend on correct care and operation. Proceed as follows when cleaning:
Follow the following instructions:
1. Spray the convertible top with the converti‐
▷ Clean roofliner with a microfiber cloth. ble top cleaner. Follow the manufacturer's
Dampen cloth lightly with water. instructions.
▷ Do not soak the roofliner. 2. Make the convertible top cleaner foam up
▷ To prevent water stains, mildew spots, and using a well saturated sponge, moving it in
chafe marks, do not enclose the convertible circular motions.
top in the convertible top well for a long 3. Finish washing the vehicle in the vehicle
period and do not fold and stow the con‐ wash or rinse with ample amounts of water.
vertible top in the convertible top well Observe notes regarding automatic wash‐
while the top is wet or frozen. ing systems or vehicle washes.
▷ Remove water stains that may nevertheless Treat the convertible top with an impregnating
have appeared on the roofliner using a mi‐ agent after it has been washed three to five
crofiber cloth and an interior cleaner. times.
▷ When the vehicle is parked in enclosed Suitable cleaning agents and care products are
areas for lengthy periods, ensure that the available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
area is well ventilated. other qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ If possible, park the vehicle in the shade to
protect it from intensive solar radiation so Leather care
that color, rubber and fabric are not af‐ Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
fected. cloth or vacuum cleaner.
▷ Remove bird droppings immediately as Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
their corrosive effect will otherwise attack chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
the convertible top and damage the rubber wear and premature degradation of the leather
seals. surface.
▷ Hard to remove tree sap or bird droppings To guard against discoloration, such as from
can be removed from the convertible top clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
with special tree sap remover and a soft roughly every two months.
brush.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
Safety information
more visible.
NOTE Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
Spot remover, paint thinner, solvents, grease will gradually break down the protective
gasoline or similar can damage the convertible layer of the leather surface.
top or the rubber coating. There is a risk of
property damage. To remove spots on the con‐
vertible top, use only suitable cleaning agents,
e.g., special convertible top cleaning agent.◀
239
MOBILITY Care
Upholstery material care Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface
General information soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐ only water and suitable cleaning agents for
uum cleaner. cleaning.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐ Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ or noises.
terial vigorously.
Fine wood parts
Safety information Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
NOTE
soft cloth.
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a Plastic components
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀ NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,
Caring for special components such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease re‐
movers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
Light-alloy wheels There is a risk of property damage. Clean with a
microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with wa‐
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
ter.◀
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam Plastic components are e. g:
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ ▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
turer's instructions.
▷ Lamp lenses.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk. ▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
them. The heat generated during braking dries Clean with a microfiber cloth.
brake discs and brake pads and protects them Dampen cloth lightly with water.
against corrosion.
Safety belts
Chrome surfaces
WARNING
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the
ularly when they have been exposed to road safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger
salt. to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for clean‐
ing the safety belts.◀
240
Care MOBILITY
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
thus have a negative impact on safety.
NOTE
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
belts clipped into their buckles.
any kind can damage the surface of displays
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
belts until they are dry. age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
Carpets and floor mats
NOTE
WARNING
The surface of displays can be damaged
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor cloth with alcohol. Extending projection lens,
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ refer to page 98.
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐ Long-term
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle's three months, special measures must be taken.
interior for cleaning. Further information is available from a dealer’s
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a service center or another qualified service cen‐
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. ter or repair shop.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Trailer hitch with removable ball

Keep the ball head and receptacle clean.
Regularly grease or oil bearings, sliding surfaces
and the small balls on the holding pin with
resin-free greases or oils.
Before using steam cleaners or high pressure
cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head
and attach the cover to the receptacle.
Do not clean the ball head with a steam cleaner
or high pressure cleaner.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
241
FIND ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in this cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. center or another qualified service center or re‐
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, pair shop.
e.g., due to the selected special equipment, The information in the vehicle documents al‐
country version or country-specific measure‐ ways has priority over the information in this
ment method. Detailed values can be found in Owner's Manual.
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
model version, equipment or country-specific the selected special equipment, tires, load and
measurement method. chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
MINI Convertible
Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932
Width without mirrors inches/mm 68/1,727
Height inches/mm 55.7/1,415
Length inches/mm 151.1-152.5/3,837-3,874
Wheelbase inches/mm 98.2/2,495
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.5/10.8
244
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
MINI Cooper Convertible
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,691/1,674

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,739/1,696
Load lbs/kg 710/322
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,011/912
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,070/939
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,770/803
Cargo area capacity cu ft 5.7-7.6
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 5.6-7.5/160-215
MINI Cooper S Convertible
Load lbs/kg 780/354
MINI John Cooper Works Convertible
245
REFERENCE Technical data
MINI John Cooper Works Convertible
Load lbs/kg 800/363
Capacities
MINI Convertible US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 11.6/44.0 Fuel quality, refer to

page 190
246
Appendix REFERENCE
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐ Este equipamento opera em caráter secun‐
hicle are listed here. dário, isto é, não tem direito a proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações
do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferên‐
Updates made after the cia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
editorial deadline Canada

These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'In‐
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐ dustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
line. exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
▷ Overview: General settings: Data protec‐ aux deux conditions suivantes :
tion. (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
▷ Fuel quality: Petrol, refer to page 190. et
▷ Wheels and tires: Wheel change: Safety in‐ (2) tl'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
formation, refer to page 205, . brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
License Texts and Certifi‐ FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
cations
Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt
The following applies in addition to the radio RSS. Operation is subject to the following two
transmission license texts of the Integrated conditions:
Owner’s Manual in the vehicle. (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
Remote Control
(2) this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may cause
Argentine Republic
undesired operation.
CNC Aprobado No.: H-12091
FCC § 15.21 Information to user
Brazil Changes or modifications not expressly ap‐
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Indonesia
29311/SDPPI/2013
2181
247
REFERENCE Appendix
Japan No.: ESD-1307076C
Singapore
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA101586
South Africa
201-135124
Mexico
COFETEL: RLVBHEID13–0912
Marca: Hella
Modelo (s): IDGNG1
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las si‐
guientes dos condiciones: TA-2013/004
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no APPROVED

cause interferencia perjudicial y
(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual‐ Taiwan
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda 本產品符合低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法第十
causar su operación no deseada. 二條、第十四條等條文規定
1. 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許
Oman 可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、
OMAN TRA 加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
TRA/TA-R/1037/13 2. 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干
D090258 擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停
用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
Philippines 前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通
信。
低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及
醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
UAE
TRA REGISTERED No: ER0107463/13
DEALER No: DA0053436/10
USA
NTC
FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements
Type Approved
248
Appendix REFERENCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
FCC § 15.21 Information to user
Changes or modifications not expressly ap‐
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
249
REFERENCE
250
REFERENCE
251
REFERENCE
252
REFERENCE
253
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Always Open Timer, Control B
Display 100
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ Always Open Timer, onboard Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
tem 127 computer 94 bar support 56
Acceleration Assistant, see Antifreeze, washer fluid 77 Backrest, seats 55
Launch Control 81 Antilock Brake System, Band-aids, see First-aid
Accessories and parts 8 ABS 127 kit 231
ACC, see camera-based cruise Anti-slip control, see DSC 127 Battery replacement, vehicle
control 131 App, MINI Motorer’s Guide 6 battery 229
Activated-charcoal filter 155 Approved axle load 245 Battery, vehicle 229
Active Cruise Control, see Arrival time 94 Being towed, see Tow-starting
camera-based cruise con‐ Ash tray 161 and towing 233
trol 131 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ Belts, safety belts 57
Additives, oil 214 tance 231 Beverage holder, cup
Adjustments, steering Assistance when driving holder 165
wheel 63 off 130 Bonus range, GREEN
After washing vehicle 238 AUTO intensity 154 Mode 181
Airbags 109 Automatic climate con‐ Bottle holder, see Cup
Airbags, indicator/warning trol 152 holder 165
light 110 Automatic Curb Monitor 62 Brake assistant 127
Air circulation, see Recircu‐ Automatic deactivation, Front- Brake discs, break-in 174
lated-air mode 150, 154 seat passenger airbags 111 Brake pads, break-in 174
Air conditioner 149 Automatic headlight con‐ Braking, information 175
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐ trol 104 Breakdown assistance 231
ing function 150, 153 Automatic locking 44 Break-in 174
Air distribution, man‐ Automatic transmission with Brightness of Control Dis‐
ual 151, 154 Steptronic 78 play 97
Air flow, air conditioner 150 Automatic vehicle wash 237 Bug light 222
Air flow, automatic climate AUTO program, automatic cli‐ Bulb replacement 221
control 154 mate control 153 Bulb replacement,
Air pressure, tires 192 AUTO program, intensity 154 front 222, 224
Air vents, see Ventilation 155 Auto Start/Stop function 70 Bulb replacement, rear 225
Alarm system 45 Auto washing 237 Bulb replacement, side 228
Alarm triggering 45 AUX-IN port, position in vehi‐ Bulbs and lights 221
Alarm, unintentional 46 cle 162 Button, Start/Stop 68
All around the interior mir‐ Average fuel consumption 93 Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ror 17 Average speed 93 ing 231
All-season tires, see Winter Axle loads, weights 245
tires 199
Alternative oil types 214
254
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
C Chassis number, see vehicle Confirmation signal 44

identification number 10 Control Display 18
California Proposition 65 Check Control 84 Control Display, settings 96
Warning 8 Checking the oil level elec‐ Controller 19
Camera-based assistance sys‐ tronically 212 Control systems, driving stabil‐
tems, see Intelligent Children, seating position 64 ity 127
Safety 119 Children, transporting Convenient closing with the
Camera-based cruise con‐ safely 64 remote control 35
trol 131 Child restraint fixing system Convenient opening 35
Camera lenses, care 241 LATCH 66 Convertible, convertible
Camera, rearview cam‐ Child restraint system 64 top 48
era 142 Child restraint systems, Convertible mode, automatic
Can holder, see Cup mounting 65 climate control 154
holder 165 Child seat, mounting 65 Convertible program, auto‐
Car battery 229 Child seats 64 matic climate control 154
Care, displays 241 Chrome parts, care 240 Convertible, roof 48
Care, vehicle 238 Chrono package, cockpit 101 Convertible top 48
Care, washing the vehicle 237 CID (central information dis‐ Convertible top, care 239
Cargo area 167 play), refer to On-Board Convertible top, cargo area
Cargo area, enlarging 169 computer 92 partition 51
Cargo area, loading 168 Cigarette lighter 161 Convertible top, emergency
Cargo area partition 170 Cleaning, displays 241 operation 51
Cargo area, storage compart‐ Climate control 149, 152 Convertible top, rollover pro‐
ments 169 Coasting 182 tection system 112
Cargo, stowing and secur‐ Coasting with engine decou‐ Coolant 216
ing 168 pled, coasting 182 Cooling function 150, 153
Cargo straps 169 Coasting with idling en‐ Cooling, maximum 153
Carpet, care 241 gine 182 Cooling system 216
Catalytic converter, see Hot Combination switch, see Turn Cornering light 105
exhaust system 175 signals 73 Corrosion on brake discs 176
CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Combi switch, see wiper sys‐ Cosmetic mirror 161
ice 218 tem 74 Courtesy lights during unlock‐
Center armrest 165 Comfort Access 39 ing 35
Center console 16 Comfort entry 35 Courtesy lights with the vehi‐
Central instrument cluster, Compartments in the cle locked 36
LED ring 97 doors 165 Cruise control 136
Central locking system, un‐ Compass 159 Cruise control, active 131
locking, from inside 39 Compressor 200 Cruise control with distance
Central screen, see Control Condensation on win‐ control, see camera-based
Display 18 dows 155 cruise control 131
Changes, technical, see For Condensation under the vehi‐ Cruise control without dis‐
Your Own Safety 7 cle 176 tance control, see cruise con‐
Changing parts 220 Condition Based Service trol 136
Changing wheels 205 CBS 218 Cruising range 89
Changing wheels/tires 198 Configuring driving pro‐ Cup holder 165
gram 130 Current fuel consumption 89
255
D Driving Dynamics Control, see Emergency wheel, compact

MINI Driving Modes wheel, see Emergency
Damage, tires 198 switch 129 wheel 208
Damping control, dy‐ Driving Excitement, SPORT 95 Energy Control 89
namic 129 Driving instructions, break- Engine, automatic Start/Stop
Data, technical 244, 246 in 174 function 70
Date 96 Driving mode, GREEN 179 Engine, automatic switch-
Date display 89 Driving modes 129 off 70
Daytime running lights 105 Driving notes, general 175 Engine compartment 210
Defrosting, see defrosting the Driving on racetracks 177 Engine compartment, working
windows 151 Driving stability control sys‐ in 210
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐ tems 127 Engine coolant 216
frosting 155 Driving style analysis 183 Engine idling when driving,
Defrosting the windows 151 Driving tip, GREEN tip 181 coasting 182
Dehumidifying, air 150, 153 Driving tips 175 Engine oil 212
Deleting personal data 24 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Engine oil, adding 213
Deletion of personal data 24 trol 127 Engine oil additives 214
Destination distance 94 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Engine oil change 214
Digital clock 88 trol 128 Engine oil filler neck 213
Digital compass 159 Dynamic Damping Con‐ Engine oil types, alterna‐
Dimensions 244 trol 129 tive 214
Dimmable exterior mirrors 62 Dynamic Stability Control Engine oil types, suitable 214
Dimmable interior mirror 63 DSC 127 Engine start, jump-start‐
Direction indicator, see Turn Dynamic Traction Control ing 231
signals 73 DTC 128 Engine start, see Starting the
Display, electronic, instrument engine 69
cluster 84 E Engine stop 70
Display, engine tempera‐ Engine temperature, dis‐
ture 94 Easy-Load function, see Load‐ play 94
Display, GREEN Mode 179 ing aid 168 Entering a vehicle wash 237
Display lighting, see Instru‐ Electronic displays, instrument Equipment, interior 157
ment lighting 107 cluster 84 Error displays, see Check Con‐
Displays 83 Electronic oil measure‐ trol 84
Displays, care 241 ment 212 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
Disposal, coolant 217 Electronic Stability Program gram, see DSC 127
Disposal, vehicle battery 229 ESP, see DSC 127 Exchanging wheels/tires 198
Distance control, see PDC 138 Emergency operation, conver‐ Exhaust system 175
Distance to destination 94 tible top 51 Exiting a vehicle wash 237
Divided screen view, split Emergency release, fuel filler Expanding the cargo area vol‐
screen 23 flap 189 ume 170
Drive-off assistant 130 Emergency service, see Road‐ Exterior mirror, automatic
Drive-off assistant, see side Assistance 231 dimming feature 62
DSC 127 Emergency unlocking, tail‐ Exterior mirrors 61
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ gate 42 Exterior mirrors, Automatic
gent Safety 119 Curb Monitor 62
External start 231
256
External temperature dis‐ Fuel 190 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

play 88 Fuel cap 188 ture 104
External temperature warn‐ Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ Headlight flasher 74
ing 88 age fuel consumption 93 Headlight glass 221
Eyes for securing cargo 169 Fuel filler flap 188 Headlights, care 238
Fuel gauge 88 Head restraints, front 59
F Fuel quality 190 Head restraints, rear 60
Fuel recommendation 190 Head-up Display 98
Failure message, see Check Fuel, tank capacity 246 Head-Up Display, Shift point
Control 84 Functions and controls in the indicator 100
False alarm, see Unintentional center console 16 Head-up Display, sport dis‐
alarm 46 Fuse 230 plays 100
Fan, see Air flow 150, 154 Head-up Display, standard
Favorites buttons, onboard G view 99
monitor 24 Heavy cargo, stowing
Filler neck for engine oil 213 Garage door opener, see Uni‐ cargo 168
Fine wood, care 240 versal Integrated Remote High-beam Assistant 105
First-aid kit 231 Control 157 High beams 74
Flat tire, changing wheels 205 Gasoline 190 High beams/low beams, see
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 117 Gear change, Steptronic trans‐ High-beam Assistant 105
Flat tire, repairing 200 mission 78 Hills 176
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor Gear shift indicator 90 Hill start assistant, see Drive-
TPM 113 General driving notes 175 off assistant 130
Flat tire, warning Glare shield 161 Holder for beverages 165
lamp 115, 118 Glove compartment 164 Homepage 6
Flooding 175 GREEN bonus range 181 Hood 210
Floor carpet, care 241 GREEN Mode 179 Horn 14
Floor mats, care 241 GREEN Mode driving style Hot exhaust system 175
Fogged up windows 151 analysis 183 HUD Head-up Display 98
Fold-away position, wind‐ GREEN - program, driving dy‐ Hydroplaning 175
shield wipers 76 namics 129
Fold back rear seat backr‐ GREEN tip, driving tip 181 I
ests 169 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
Foot brake 175 proved 245 Ice warning, see External tem‐
For Your Own Safety 7 Ground clearance 176 perature warning 88
Front airbags 109 Icy roads, see External tem‐
Front-end collision warning H perature warning 88
with City Braking func‐ Identification marks, tires 196
tion 120 Halogen headlights 222 Identification number, see ve‐
Front fog lights 106 Handbrake, see parking hicle identification num‐
Front-seat passenger airbags, brake 72 ber 10
automatic deactivation 111 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ Ignition off 68
Front-seat passenger airbags, nating code 158 Ignition on 68
indicator light 111 Hazard warning flashers 231 Illuminated ring, central in‐
Front seats 55 Headlight control, auto‐ strument cluster 97
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 117 matic 104
257
Indication of a flat J Light replacement, rear 225

tire 115, 118 Light replacement, side 228
Indicator light, see Check Con‐ Jacking points for the vehicle Lights and bulbs 221
trol 84 jack 206 Light switch 103
Individual air distribu‐ Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Load 168
tion 151, 154 sion 78 Loading 167
Individual settings, see Per‐ Jump-starting 231 Loading aid 168
sonal Profile 42 Locking, automatic 44
Inflation pressure, tires 192 K Locking, from inside 39
Inflation pressure warning, Locking, settings 44
tires 117 Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ Low beams 103
Information 6 cess 39 Low beams, automatic, see
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Key Memory, see Personal High-beam Assistant 105
tor TPM 114 Profile 42 Lower back support, mechani‐
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor Key, see Integrated key 38 cal 56
FTM 117 Key, see Remote control 34 Lumbar support, mechani‐
Instrument cluster 83 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ cal 56
Instrument cluster, electronic mission 79
displays 84 Knee airbag 109 M
Instrument lighting 107
Integrated key 38 L Maintenance 218
Integrated Owner's Manual in Maintenance require‐
the vehicle 29 Label on recommended ments 218
Intelligent Safety 119 tires 199 Maintenance, service require‐
Intended use 7 Language on Control Dis‐ ments 89
Intensity, AUTO program 154 play 96 Maintenance system,
Interior equipment 157 Lashing eyes 169 MINI 218
Interior lights 107 LATCH child restraint fixing Make-up mirror 161
Interior lights during unlock‐ system 66 Malfunction displays, see
ing 35 Launch Control 81 Check Control 84
Interior lights with the vehicle Leather, care 239 Manual air distribu‐
locked 36 LED ring, central instrument tion 151, 154
Interior mirror 17 cluster 97 Manual air flow 150, 154
Interior mirror, automatic LEDs, light-emitting di‐ Manual mode, transmis‐
dimming feature 63 odes 221 sion 79
Interior mirror, compass 159 Letters and numbers, enter‐ Manual operation, exterior
Interior mirror, manually dim‐ ing 25 mirrors 61
mable 62 Light 103 Manual operation, fuel filler
Interior motion sensor 46 Light-alloy wheels, care 240 flap 189
Internet site 6 Light-emitting diodes, Manual operation, Park Dis‐
Interval display, service re‐ LEDs 221 tance Control PDC 140
quirements 89 Lighter 161 Manual operation, rearview
Interval mode 75 Lighting 103 camera 142
In the vicinity of the steering Light replacement 221 Manual transmission 77
wheel 14 Light replacement, Manufacturer of the MINI 7
front 222, 224 Marking, run-flat tires 200
258
Maximum cooling 153 Neck restraints, front, see P

Maximum speed, display 90 Head restraints 59
Maximum speed, winter Neck restraints, rear, see Paint, vehicle 238
tires 199 Head restraints 60 Parallel parking assistant 144
Measurement, units of 97 Neutral cleaner, see Wheel Park Distance Control
Mechanical key 38 cleaner 240 PDC 138
Medical kit 231 New wheels and tires 198 Parked-car ventilation 156
Menu in instrument cluster 92 Parked vehicle, condensa‐
Menus, refer to onboard mon‐ O tion 176
itor operating concept 20 Parking aid, see PDC 138
Messages, see Check Con‐ OBD Onboard Diagnos‐ Parking assistant 144
trol 84 tics 219 Parking brake 72
Microfilter 151, 155 Obstacle marking, rearview Parking lights 103
MID - program, driving dy‐ camera 143 Parts and accessories 8
namics 129 Octane rating, see Recom‐ Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
MINI Connected, see Inte‐ mended fuel grade 191 ing 62
grated Owner's Manual Odometer 88 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
MINI driving modes 129 Office, see Integrated Owner's era 143
MINI logo projection during Manual PDC Park Distance Con‐
unlocking 35 Oil 212 trol 138
MINI maintenance sys‐ Oil, adding 213 Performance Control 128
tem 218 Oil additives 214 Personal Profile 42
MINIMALISM Analyser 183 Oil change 214 Person warning with City light
MINIMALISM information 182 Oil change interval, service re‐ braking function 123
MINI Motorer’s Guide app 6 quirements 89 Phone, see Integrated Own‐
Minimum tread, tires 198 Oil filler neck 213 er's Manual
Mirrors 61 Oil types, alternative 214 Pinch protection system, win‐
Mobile communication devi‐ Oil types, suitable 214 dows 47
ces in the vehicle 175 Old batteries, disposal 229 Plastic, care 240
Mobility System 200 Onboard computer 92 Post Crash — iBrake 126
Modifications, technical, see Onboard computer, refer to Power failure 229
For Your Own Safety 7 Onboard computer 92 Power windows 46
Moisture in headlight 221 Onboard Diagnostics Prescribed engine oil
Monitor, see Control Dis‐ OBD 219 types 214
play 18 Onboard monitor 18 Pressure, tire air pressure 192
Mounting of child restraint Onboard monitor operating Pressure warning, tires 117
systems 65 concept 18 Profile, see Personal Pro‐
Multifunction steering wheel, Onboard vehicle tool kit 220 file 42
buttons 14 Opening and closing 34 Protective function, win‐
Multimedia, see Integrated Opening, from inside 39 dows 47
Owner's Manual Operating menus, onboard Push-and-turn reel, refer to
monitor 18 controller 19
N Optional equipment 7
R
Navigation, see Integrated
Owner's Manual Racetrack operation 177
259
Radiator fluid 216 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Service requirements, dis‐
Radio-operated remote con‐ TPM 114 play 89
trol, opening/closing 34 Retreaded tires 199 Service, Roadside Assis‐
Radio ready state 68 Roadside parking lights 104 tance 231
Radio, see Integrated Owner's Rolling code hand-held trans‐ SET button, see camera-based
Manual mitter 158 cruise control 131
Rain sensor 75 Rollover protection sys‐ SET button, see Cruise con‐
Ratchet straps 169 tem 112 trol 136
Rear fog lights 106 RON recommended fuel Settings, locking/unlocking 44
Rear lights 225 grade 191 Settings, mirrors 61
Rear luggage rack 177 Roof load capacity 245 Settings on Control Display 96
Rearview camera 141 Roof, see convertible top 48 Shift gate rotary switch 129
Rearview mirror 61 RSC Run Flat System Compo‐ Shift paddles on the steering
Rear window de‐ nent, see Run-flat tires 200 wheel 80
froster 151, 155 Rubber components, Shift point indicator, Head-Up
Recirculated-air filter 155 care 240 Display 100
Recirculated-air Run-flat tires 200 Side airbag 109
mode 150, 154 Signaling, horn 14
Recommended fuel S Signals when unlocking 44
grade 191 Sitting safely 55
Recommended tire Safe braking 175 Size 244
brands 199 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ SMS text messages, supple‐
Refueling 188 er's seat and front passenger mentary 87
Remaining range 89 seat 59 Snow chains 204
Remote control, additional 37 Safety belts 57 Socket 162
Remote control, loss 37 Safety belts, care 240 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
Remote control, malfunc‐ Safety belts, rear 59 nostics 219
tion 37 Safety systems, airbags 109 Spare tire, see Emergency
Remote control, opening/clos‐ Saving fuel 178 wheel 208
ing 34 Screen, see Control Display 18 Speed, average 93
Remote control, replacing the Screwdriver 220 Speed Limit Info 90
battery 36 Sealant 200 Speed Limit Info, onboard
Remote control, univer‐ Seat belts, see Safety belts 57 computer 94
sal 157 Seat heating, front 57 Speed limits, display 90
Replacing parts 220 Seating position for chil‐ Speed warning 95
Replacing the battery, remote dren 64 Split screen 23
control 36 Seats, front 55 Sport displays 95
Replacing wheels/tires 198 Securing cargo 168 Sport displays, Head-up Dis‐
Reporting safety malfunc‐ Selection list in instrument play 100
tions 10 cluster 92 Sport instruments, cock‐
RES CNCL button, see camera- Selector lever, Steptronic pit 101
based cruise control 131 transmission 78 SPORT program, driving dy‐
RES CNCL button, see Cruise Sensors, care 241 namics 129
control 136 Service and warranty 8 Sport program, transmis‐
Reserve warning, see Service requirements, Condi‐ sion 79
Range 89 tion Based Service CBS 218 Stability control systems 127
260
Standard equipment 7 Technical data 244, 246 Transmission lock, releasing

Standard view, Head-up Dis‐ Temperature, air condi‐ manually 81
play 99 tioner 150 Transmission, manual trans‐
Start/stop, automatic func‐ Temperature, automatic cli‐ mission 77
tion 70 mate control 152 Transmission, see Steptronic
Start/Stop button 68 Temperature display for exter‐ transmission 78
Starting the engine 69 nal temperature 88 Transporting children
Status control display, Temperature, engine 94 safely 64
tires 114 Terminal, starting aid 232 Tread, tires 197
Status information, onboard Theft alarm system, see Alarm Triple turn signal activa‐
monitor 23 system 45 tion 73
Status of Owner's Manual 7 Thigh support 56 Trip odometer 88
Steering wheel, adjusting 63 Tilt alarm sensor 46 Trip onboard computer 94
Steptronic Sport transmission, Tilting, passenger's side mir‐ Trip recorder, see Trip odome‐
see Steptronic transmis‐ ror 62 ter 88
sion 78 Time 96 Trunk, cargo area parti‐
Steptronic transmission 78 Time of arrival 94 tion 170
Stopping the engine 70 Tire damage 198 Trunk, emergency unlock‐
Storage compartments 164 Tire identification marks 196 ing 42
Storage, tires 199 Tire inflation pressure 192 Turning circle lines, rearview
Storing the vehicle 241 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ camera 143
Stowing and securing tor, refer to FTM 117 Turn signal, front 222, 224
cargo 168 Tire Pressure Monitor Turn signal, side 228
Suitable engine oil types 214 TPM 113 Turn signals, operation 73
Summer tires, tread 197 Tire repair kit, see Mobility Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
Sun visor 161 System 200 placement 225
Supplementary SMS text mes‐ Tires, changing 198
sages 87 Tire sealant, see Mobility Sys‐ U
Switch for driving dynam‐ tem 200
ics 129 Tires, everything on wheels Unintentional alarm 46
Switch-on times, parked-vehi‐ and tires 192 Units of measurement 97
cle ventilation 156 Tires, run-flat tires 200 Universal remote control 157
Switch, see Cockpit 14 Tire tread 197 Unlocking, settings 44
Symbols 6 Tone, see Integrated Owner's Updates made after the edito‐
Symbols in the status field 23 Manual rial deadline 7
Tools 220 Upholstery care 240
T Total vehicle weight 245 USB interface, position in vehi‐
Touchpad 21 cle 162
Tachometer 88 Towing 233 USB port, see USB inter‐
Tailgate 41 Tow-starting 233 face 162
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐ TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ Use, intended 7
ing 42 tor 113
Tailgate via remote control 36 Traction control 128 V
Tail lights 225 TRACTION drive mode, driving
Technical changes, see For dynamics 128 Vanity mirror 161
Your Own Safety 7 Trailer hitch, care 241 Vehicle battery 229
261
Vehicle battery, replacing 229 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor

Vehicle, break-in 174 TPM 113
Vehicle care 238 Wind deflector 53
Vehicle care products 238 Window defroster,
Vehicle features and op‐ rear 151, 155
tions 7 Windows, powered 46
Vehicle identification num‐ Windshield cleaning sys‐
ber 10 tem 74
Vehicle jack 206 Windshield de‐
Vehicle paint 238 froster 151, 155
Vehicle storage 241 Windshield washer fluid 77
Vehicle wash 237 Windshield washer nozzles 76
Vehicle, washing 237 Windshield wipers, fold-away
Ventilation 155 position 76
Ventilation, see Parked-car Windshield wipers, see wiper
ventilation 156 system 74
VIN, see vehicle identification Winter storage, care 241
number 10 Winter tires, suitable tires 199
Voice activation system 26 Winter tires, tread 197
Wiper blades, replacing 220
W Wiper fluid 77
Wiper system 74
Warning and indicator lights, Wood, care 240
see Check Control 84 Word match concept, naviga‐
Warning displays, see Check tion 25
Control 84 Wrench 220
Warning messages, see Check
Control 84
Warning triangle 231
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 77
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 76
Washing the vehicle 237
Water on roads 175
Weights 245
Welcome lights 104
Welcome lights during unlock‐
ing 35
Wheel cleaner 240
Wheels, changing 198
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 192
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 117
262
*BL291510200E*
01 40 2 915 102 ue
DRIVE ME.

Manual F57

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual F57

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual F57

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 915 102 - X/16

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 915 102 - X/16

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 915 102 - X/16

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 915 102 - X/16

Action steps Status of the Owner's

Warranty The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐

Event Data Recorder EDR Vehicle identification

You can also obtain other information about

For Canadian customers

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 915 102 - X/16

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 915 102 - X/16

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows, all 46 Light switch 103

Low beams 103

Automatic headlight control 104 Roadside parking lights 104

Cruise control on/off 136 Rain sensor 75

Cruise control: store speed Cleaning windows 75

Pausing, continuing cruise control

Confirm the selection 92

High beams, head‐ Reduce volume

High-beam Assistant 105

12 Adjust the steering wheel 63

Functions and controls in the center console

1 Hazard warning system 231 Start/stop the engine and switch

Intelligent Safety 119 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

2 Control Display 18 Head-up Display 98

All around the interior mirror

1 Emergency Request 4 Ambient light 107

2 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐ 5 Convertible top 48

3 Reading lights 107 6 Interior lights 107

Concept 1 Control Display

Safety information General information

Buttons on the controller

MENU Opens the main menu.

Controller with navigation system RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

Controller without navigation system

▷ Move in four directions.

▷ Move in two directions. The main menu is displayed.

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

Buttons on the controller

MENU Opens the main menu.

AUDIO Open audio menu last listened to,

TEL Opens the Phone menu. 2. Press the controller.

Operating concept Changing between panels

3. Press the controller.

▷ The system distinguishes between upper Example: setting the

Interactive map. Swipe into respective di‐

Enlarge/shrink in‐ Drag in or out on the

Display menu. Tap once.

Status information Symbol Meaning

SIM card is missing.

USB audio interface.

Symbol Meaning Spoken instructions are turned off.

HD Radio station is being received.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Roaming is active. 1. Press button.

Check the SIM card. Selecting the display

Deleting the button assignments